Coverage Report

Created: 2025-03-01 06:26

/src/mbedtls/include/mbedtls/ssl.h
Line
Count
Source (jump to first uncovered line)
1
/**
2
 * \file ssl.h
3
 *
4
 * \brief SSL/TLS functions.
5
 */
6
/*
7
 *  Copyright The Mbed TLS Contributors
8
 *  SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 OR GPL-2.0-or-later
9
 */
10
#ifndef MBEDTLS_SSL_H
11
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_H
12
#include "mbedtls/platform_util.h"
13
#include "mbedtls/private_access.h"
14
15
#include "mbedtls/build_info.h"
16
17
#include "mbedtls/bignum.h"
18
#include "mbedtls/ecp.h"
19
20
#include "mbedtls/ssl_ciphersuites.h"
21
22
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
23
#include "mbedtls/x509_crt.h"
24
#include "mbedtls/x509_crl.h"
25
#endif
26
27
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C)
28
#include "mbedtls/dhm.h"
29
#endif
30
31
#include "mbedtls/md.h"
32
33
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_SOME_ECDH_OR_ECDHE_ANY_ENABLED)
34
#include "mbedtls/ecdh.h"
35
#endif
36
37
#if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
38
#include "mbedtls/platform_time.h"
39
#endif
40
41
#include "psa/crypto.h"
42
43
/*
44
 * SSL Error codes
45
 */
46
/** A cryptographic operation is in progress. Try again later. */
47
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS                -0x7000
48
/** The requested feature is not available. */
49
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE               -0x7080
50
/** Bad input parameters to function. */
51
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA                    -0x7100
52
/** Verification of the message MAC failed. */
53
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC                       -0x7180
54
/** An invalid SSL record was received. */
55
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_RECORD                    -0x7200
56
/** The connection indicated an EOF. */
57
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CONN_EOF                          -0x7280
58
/** A message could not be parsed due to a syntactic error. */
59
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_DECODE_ERROR                      -0x7300
60
/* Error space gap */
61
/** No RNG was provided to the SSL module. */
62
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_RNG                            -0x7400
63
/** No client certification received from the client, but required by the authentication mode. */
64
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE             -0x7480
65
/** Client received an extended server hello containing an unsupported extension */
66
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNSUPPORTED_EXTENSION             -0x7500
67
/** No ALPN protocols supported that the client advertises */
68
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_APPLICATION_PROTOCOL           -0x7580
69
/** The own private key or pre-shared key is not set, but needed. */
70
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PRIVATE_KEY_REQUIRED              -0x7600
71
/** No CA Chain is set, but required to operate. */
72
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CA_CHAIN_REQUIRED                 -0x7680
73
/** An unexpected message was received from our peer. */
74
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_MESSAGE                -0x7700
75
/** A fatal alert message was received from our peer. */
76
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FATAL_ALERT_MESSAGE               -0x7780
77
/** No server could be identified matching the client's SNI. */
78
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME                 -0x7800
79
/** The peer notified us that the connection is going to be closed. */
80
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PEER_CLOSE_NOTIFY                 -0x7880
81
/* Error space gap */
82
/* Error space gap */
83
/** Processing of the Certificate handshake message failed. */
84
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_CERTIFICATE                   -0x7A00
85
/* Error space gap */
86
/** A TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket message has been received. */
87
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET       -0x7B00
88
/** Not possible to read early data */
89
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_READ_EARLY_DATA            -0x7B80
90
/**
91
 * Early data has been received as part of an on-going handshake.
92
 * This error code can be returned only on server side if and only if early
93
 * data has been enabled by means of the mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data() API.
94
 * This error code can then be returned by mbedtls_ssl_handshake(),
95
 * mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or mbedtls_ssl_write() if
96
 * early data has been received as part of the handshake sequence they
97
 * triggered. To read the early data, call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data().
98
 */
99
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA               -0x7C00
100
/** Not possible to write early data */
101
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA           -0x7C80
102
/* Error space gap */
103
/* Error space gap */
104
/* Error space gap */
105
/* Error space gap */
106
/** Cache entry not found */
107
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CACHE_ENTRY_NOT_FOUND             -0x7E80
108
/** Memory allocation failed */
109
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED                      -0x7F00
110
/** Hardware acceleration function returned with error */
111
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FAILED                   -0x7F80
112
/** Hardware acceleration function skipped / left alone data */
113
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH              -0x6F80
114
/** Handshake protocol not within min/max boundaries */
115
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_PROTOCOL_VERSION              -0x6E80
116
/** The handshake negotiation failed. */
117
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE                 -0x6E00
118
/** Session ticket has expired. */
119
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_SESSION_TICKET_EXPIRED            -0x6D80
120
/** Public key type mismatch (eg, asked for RSA key exchange and presented EC key) */
121
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PK_TYPE_MISMATCH                  -0x6D00
122
/** Unknown identity received (eg, PSK identity) */
123
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNKNOWN_IDENTITY                  -0x6C80
124
/** Internal error (eg, unexpected failure in lower-level module) */
125
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INTERNAL_ERROR                    -0x6C00
126
/** A counter would wrap (eg, too many messages exchanged). */
127
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_COUNTER_WRAPPING                  -0x6B80
128
/** Unexpected message at ServerHello in renegotiation. */
129
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WAITING_SERVER_HELLO_RENEGO       -0x6B00
130
/** DTLS client must retry for hello verification */
131
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED             -0x6A80
132
/** A buffer is too small to receive or write a message */
133
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL                  -0x6A00
134
/* Error space gap */
135
/** No data of requested type currently available on underlying transport. */
136
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ                         -0x6900
137
/** Connection requires a write call. */
138
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE                        -0x6880
139
/** The operation timed out. */
140
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_TIMEOUT                           -0x6800
141
/** The client initiated a reconnect from the same port. */
142
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT                  -0x6780
143
/** Record header looks valid but is not expected. */
144
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_RECORD                 -0x6700
145
/** The alert message received indicates a non-fatal error. */
146
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NON_FATAL                         -0x6680
147
/** A field in a message was incorrect or inconsistent with other fields. */
148
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ILLEGAL_PARAMETER                 -0x6600
149
/** Internal-only message signaling that further message-processing should be done */
150
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CONTINUE_PROCESSING               -0x6580
151
/** The asynchronous operation is not completed yet. */
152
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS                 -0x6500
153
/** Internal-only message signaling that a message arrived early. */
154
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_EARLY_MESSAGE                     -0x6480
155
/* Error space gap */
156
/* Error space gap */
157
/* Error space gap */
158
/* Error space gap */
159
/* Error space gap */
160
/* Error space gap */
161
/* Error space gap */
162
/* Error space gap */
163
/** An encrypted DTLS-frame with an unexpected CID was received. */
164
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID                    -0x6000
165
/** An operation failed due to an unexpected version or configuration. */
166
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH                  -0x5F00
167
/** Invalid value in SSL config */
168
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_CONFIG                        -0x5E80
169
170
/*
171
 * Constants from RFC 8446 for TLS 1.3 PSK modes
172
 *
173
 * Those are used in the Pre-Shared Key Exchange Modes extension.
174
 * See Section 4.2.9 in RFC 8446.
175
 */
176
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_PSK_MODE_PURE  0 /* Pure PSK-based exchange  */
177
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_PSK_MODE_ECDHE 1 /* PSK+ECDHE-based exchange */
178
179
/*
180
 * TLS 1.3 NamedGroup values
181
 *
182
 * From RF 8446
183
 *    enum {
184
 *         // Elliptic Curve Groups (ECDHE)
185
 *         secp256r1(0x0017), secp384r1(0x0018), secp521r1(0x0019),
186
 *         x25519(0x001D), x448(0x001E),
187
 *         // Finite Field Groups (DHE)
188
 *         ffdhe2048(0x0100), ffdhe3072(0x0101), ffdhe4096(0x0102),
189
 *         ffdhe6144(0x0103), ffdhe8192(0x0104),
190
 *         // Reserved Code Points
191
 *         ffdhe_private_use(0x01FC..0x01FF),
192
 *         ecdhe_private_use(0xFE00..0xFEFF),
193
 *         (0xFFFF)
194
 *     } NamedGroup;
195
 *
196
 */
197
198
/* Elliptic Curve Groups (ECDHE) */
199
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_NONE               0
200
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP192K1     0x0012
201
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP192R1     0x0013
202
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP224K1     0x0014
203
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP224R1     0x0015
204
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP256K1     0x0016
205
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP256R1     0x0017
206
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP384R1     0x0018
207
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP521R1     0x0019
208
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP256R1       0x001A
209
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP384R1       0x001B
210
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP512R1       0x001C
211
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_X25519        0x001D
212
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_X448          0x001E
213
/* Finite Field Groups (DHE) */
214
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE2048     0x0100
215
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE3072     0x0101
216
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE4096     0x0102
217
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE6144     0x0103
218
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE8192     0x0104
219
220
/*
221
 * TLS 1.3 Key Exchange Modes
222
 *
223
 * Mbed TLS internal identifiers for use with the SSL configuration API
224
 * mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_key_exchange_modes().
225
 */
226
227
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK            (1u << 0)   /*!< Pure-PSK TLS 1.3 key exchange,
228
                                                                         *   encompassing both externally agreed PSKs
229
                                                                         *   as well as resumption PSKs. */
230
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL      (1u << 1)   /*!< Pure-Ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges,
231
                                                                         *   including for example ECDHE and DHE
232
                                                                         *   key exchanges. */
233
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL  (1u << 2)   /*!< PSK-Ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges,
234
                                                                         *   using both a PSK and an ephemeral
235
                                                                         *   key exchange. */
236
237
/* Convenience macros for sets of key exchanges. */
238
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_ALL                         \
239
    (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK              |            \
240
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL    |            \
241
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL)          /*!< All TLS 1.3 key exchanges           */
242
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_ALL                     \
243
    (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK              |            \
244
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL)      /*!< All PSK-based TLS 1.3 key exchanges */
245
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL_ALL               \
246
    (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL        |            \
247
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL)      /*!< All ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges */
248
249
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_NONE   (0)
250
251
/*
252
 * Various constants
253
 */
254
255
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
256
/* These are the high and low bytes of ProtocolVersion as defined by:
257
 * - RFC 5246: ProtocolVersion version = { 3, 3 };     // TLS v1.2
258
 * - RFC 8446: see section 4.2.1
259
 */
260
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3             3
261
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3             3   /*!< TLS v1.2 */
262
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4             4   /*!< TLS v1.3 */
263
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
264
265
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM            0   /*!< TLS      */
266
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM          1   /*!< DTLS     */
267
268
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_HOST_NAME_LEN           255 /*!< Maximum host name defined in RFC 1035 */
269
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_ALPN_NAME_LEN           255 /*!< Maximum size in bytes of a protocol name in alpn ext., RFC 7301 */
270
271
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_ALPN_LIST_LEN           65535 /*!< Maximum size in bytes of list in alpn ext., RFC 7301          */
272
273
/* RFC 6066 section 4, see also mfl_code_to_length in ssl_tls.c
274
 * NONE must be zero so that memset()ing structure to zero works */
275
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE           0   /*!< don't use this extension   */
276
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_512            1   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^9      */
277
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_1024           2   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^10     */
278
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_2048           3   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^11     */
279
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_4096           4   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^12     */
280
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_INVALID        5   /*!< first invalid value        */
281
282
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT                   0
283
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER                   1
284
285
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_DISABLED        0
286
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED         1
287
288
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED                0
289
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED                 1
290
291
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_DISABLED                0
292
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED                 1
293
294
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_COMPRESS_NULL               0
295
296
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE                 0
297
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL             1
298
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED             2
299
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_UNSET                3 /* Used only for sni_authmode */
300
301
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION        0
302
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SECURE_RENEGOTIATION        1
303
304
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED      0
305
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_ENABLED       1
306
307
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_DISABLED        0
308
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_ENABLED         1
309
310
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_NOT_ENFORCED  -1
311
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGO_MAX_RECORDS_DEFAULT  16
312
313
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION     0
314
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_ALLOW_RENEGOTIATION  1
315
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE      2
316
317
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNC_HMAC_DISABLED         0
318
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNC_HMAC_ENABLED          1
319
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNCATED_HMAC_LEN          10  /* 80 bits, rfc 6066 section 7 */
320
321
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED     0
322
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED      1
323
324
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED  0
325
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED   1
326
327
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_DEFAULT              0
328
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_SUITEB               2
329
330
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_ENABLED       1
331
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_DISABLED      0
332
333
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED        0
334
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED         1
335
336
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED    0
337
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_SUPPORTED      1
338
339
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_CLIENT  1
340
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER  0
341
342
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
343
#if defined(PSA_WANT_ALG_SHA_384)
344
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN        48
345
#elif defined(PSA_WANT_ALG_SHA_256)
346
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN        32
347
#endif
348
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
349
/*
350
 * Default range for DTLS retransmission timer value, in milliseconds.
351
 * RFC 6347 4.2.4.1 says from 1 second to 60 seconds.
352
 */
353
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_TIMEOUT_DFL_MIN    1000
354
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_TIMEOUT_DFL_MAX   60000
355
356
/*
357
 * Whether early data record should be discarded or not and how.
358
 *
359
 * The client has indicated early data and the server has rejected them.
360
 * The server has then to skip past early data by either:
361
 * - attempting to deprotect received records using the handshake traffic
362
 *   key, discarding records which fail deprotection (up to the configured
363
 *   max_early_data_size). Once a record is deprotected successfully,
364
 *   it is treated as the start of the client's second flight and the
365
 *   server proceeds as with an ordinary 1-RTT handshake.
366
 * - skipping all records with an external content type of
367
 *   "application_data" (indicating that they are encrypted), up to the
368
 *   configured max_early_data_size. This is the expected behavior if the
369
 *   server has sent an HelloRetryRequest message. The server ignores
370
 *   application data message before 2nd ClientHello.
371
 */
372
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_NO_DISCARD 0
373
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_TRY_TO_DEPROTECT_AND_DISCARD 1
374
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISCARD 2
375
376
/**
377
 * \name SECTION: Module settings
378
 *
379
 * The configuration options you can set for this module are in this section.
380
 * Either change them in mbedtls_config.h or define them on the compiler command line.
381
 * \{
382
 */
383
384
/*
385
 * Maximum fragment length in bytes,
386
 * determines the size of each of the two internal I/O buffers.
387
 *
388
 * Note: the RFC defines the default size of SSL / TLS messages. If you
389
 * change the value here, other clients / servers may not be able to
390
 * communicate with you anymore. Only change this value if you control
391
 * both sides of the connection and have it reduced at both sides, or
392
 * if you're using the Max Fragment Length extension and you know all your
393
 * peers are using it too!
394
 */
395
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN)
396
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN 16384
397
#endif
398
399
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN)
400
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN 16384
401
#endif
402
403
/*
404
 * Maximum number of heap-allocated bytes for the purpose of
405
 * DTLS handshake message reassembly and future message buffering.
406
 */
407
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_MAX_BUFFERING)
408
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_MAX_BUFFERING 32768
409
#endif
410
411
/*
412
 * Maximum length of CIDs for incoming and outgoing messages.
413
 */
414
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX)
415
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX          32
416
#endif
417
418
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX)
419
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX         32
420
#endif
421
422
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_TLS1_3_PADDING_GRANULARITY)
423
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_TLS1_3_PADDING_GRANULARITY 16
424
#endif
425
426
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE)
427
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE        1024
428
#endif
429
430
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_AGE_TOLERANCE)
431
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_AGE_TOLERANCE 6000
432
#endif
433
434
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_NONCE_LENGTH)
435
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_NONCE_LENGTH 32
436
#endif
437
438
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS)
439
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS 1
440
#endif
441
442
/** \} name SECTION: Module settings */
443
444
/*
445
 * Default to standard CID mode
446
 */
447
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID) && \
448
    !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT)
449
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT 0
450
#endif
451
452
/*
453
 * Length of the verify data for secure renegotiation
454
 */
455
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN 12
456
457
/*
458
 * Signaling ciphersuite values (SCSV)
459
 */
460
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EMPTY_RENEGOTIATION_INFO    0xFF   /**< renegotiation info ext */
461
462
/*
463
 * Supported Signature and Hash algorithms (For TLS 1.2)
464
 * RFC 5246 section 7.4.1.4.1
465
 */
466
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_NONE                0
467
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_MD5                 1
468
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA1                2
469
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA224              3
470
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA256              4
471
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA384              5
472
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA512              6
473
474
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_ANON                 0
475
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_RSA                  1
476
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_ECDSA                3
477
478
/*
479
 * TLS 1.3 signature algorithms
480
 * RFC 8446, Section 4.2.3
481
 */
482
483
/* RSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5 algorithms */
484
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA256 0x0401
485
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA384 0x0501
486
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA512 0x0601
487
488
/* ECDSA algorithms */
489
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP256R1_SHA256 0x0403
490
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP384R1_SHA384 0x0503
491
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP521R1_SHA512 0x0603
492
493
/* RSASSA-PSS algorithms with public key OID rsaEncryption */
494
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA256 0x0804
495
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA384 0x0805
496
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA512 0x0806
497
498
/* EdDSA algorithms */
499
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ED25519 0x0807
500
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ED448 0x0808
501
502
/* RSASSA-PSS algorithms with public key OID RSASSA-PSS  */
503
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA256 0x0809
504
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA384 0x080A
505
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA512 0x080B
506
507
/* LEGACY ALGORITHMS */
508
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA1 0x0201
509
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SHA1     0x0203
510
511
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_NONE 0x0
512
513
/*
514
 * Client Certificate Types
515
 * RFC 5246 section 7.4.4 plus RFC 4492 section 5.5
516
 */
517
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_TYPE_RSA_SIGN       1
518
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_TYPE_ECDSA_SIGN    64
519
520
/*
521
 * Message, alert and handshake types
522
 */
523
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC     20
524
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_ALERT                  21
525
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_HANDSHAKE              22
526
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_APPLICATION_DATA       23
527
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_CID                    25
528
529
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_WARNING         1
530
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_FATAL           2
531
532
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CLOSE_NOTIFY           0  /* 0x00 */
533
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNEXPECTED_MESSAGE    10  /* 0x0A */
534
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_BAD_RECORD_MAC        20  /* 0x14 */
535
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECRYPTION_FAILED     21  /* 0x15 */
536
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_RECORD_OVERFLOW       22  /* 0x16 */
537
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECOMPRESSION_FAILURE 30  /* 0x1E */
538
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE     40  /* 0x28 */
539
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_CERT               41  /* 0x29 */
540
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_BAD_CERT              42  /* 0x2A */
541
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNSUPPORTED_CERT      43  /* 0x2B */
542
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_REVOKED          44  /* 0x2C */
543
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_EXPIRED          45  /* 0x2D */
544
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_UNKNOWN          46  /* 0x2E */
545
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_ILLEGAL_PARAMETER     47  /* 0x2F */
546
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNKNOWN_CA            48  /* 0x30 */
547
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_ACCESS_DENIED         49  /* 0x31 */
548
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECODE_ERROR          50  /* 0x32 */
549
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECRYPT_ERROR         51  /* 0x33 */
550
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_EXPORT_RESTRICTION    60  /* 0x3C */
551
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_PROTOCOL_VERSION      70  /* 0x46 */
552
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY 71  /* 0x47 */
553
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR        80  /* 0x50 */
554
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INAPROPRIATE_FALLBACK 86  /* 0x56 */
555
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_USER_CANCELED         90  /* 0x5A */
556
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_RENEGOTIATION     100  /* 0x64 */
557
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_MISSING_EXTENSION    109  /* 0x6d -- new in TLS 1.3 */
558
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNSUPPORTED_EXT      110  /* 0x6E */
559
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME    112  /* 0x70 */
560
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNKNOWN_PSK_IDENTITY 115  /* 0x73 */
561
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_REQUIRED        116  /* 0x74 */
562
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_APPLICATION_PROTOCOL 120 /* 0x78 */
563
564
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_HELLO_REQUEST            0
565
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CLIENT_HELLO             1
566
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_HELLO             2
567
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUEST     3
568
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_NEW_SESSION_TICKET       4
569
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_END_OF_EARLY_DATA        5
570
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_ENCRYPTED_EXTENSIONS     8
571
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE             11
572
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_KEY_EXCHANGE     12
573
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE_REQUEST     13
574
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_HELLO_DONE       14
575
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY      15
576
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CLIENT_KEY_EXCHANGE     16
577
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_FINISHED                20
578
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_MESSAGE_HASH           254
579
580
/*
581
 * TLS extensions
582
 */
583
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERVERNAME                   0
584
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERVERNAME_HOSTNAME          0
585
586
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH          1
587
588
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_TRUNCATED_HMAC               4
589
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_STATUS_REQUEST               5 /* RFC 6066 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
590
591
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_ELLIPTIC_CURVES   10
592
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_GROUPS            10 /* RFC 8422,7919 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
593
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_POINT_FORMATS     11
594
595
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SIG_ALG                     13 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
596
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_USE_SRTP                    14
597
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_HEARTBEAT                   15 /* RFC 6520 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
598
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ALPN                        16
599
600
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SCT                         18 /* RFC 6962 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
601
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CLI_CERT_TYPE               19 /* RFC 7250 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
602
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERV_CERT_TYPE              20 /* RFC 7250 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
603
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PADDING                     21 /* RFC 7685 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
604
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC            22 /* 0x16 */
605
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET  0x0017 /* 23 */
606
607
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT           28 /* RFC 8449 (implemented for TLS 1.3 only) */
608
609
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SESSION_TICKET              35
610
611
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PRE_SHARED_KEY              41 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
612
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_EARLY_DATA                  42 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
613
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_VERSIONS          43 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
614
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_COOKIE                      44 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
615
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PSK_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODES      45 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
616
617
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CERT_AUTH                   47 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
618
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_OID_FILTERS                 48 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
619
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH         49 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
620
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SIG_ALG_CERT                50 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
621
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_KEY_SHARE                   51 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
622
623
#if MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT == 0
624
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CID                         54 /* RFC 9146 DTLS 1.2 CID */
625
#else
626
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CID                        254 /* Pre-RFC 9146 DTLS 1.2 CID */
627
#endif
628
629
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ECJPAKE_KKPP               256 /* experimental */
630
631
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_RENEGOTIATION_INFO      0xFF01
632
633
/*
634
 * Size defines
635
 */
636
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN)
637
/*
638
 * If the library supports TLS 1.3 tickets and the cipher suite
639
 * TLS1-3-AES-256-GCM-SHA384, set the PSK maximum length to 48 instead of 32.
640
 * That way, the TLS 1.3 client and server are able to resume sessions where
641
 * the cipher suite is TLS1-3-AES-256-GCM-SHA384 (pre-shared keys are 48
642
 * bytes long in that case).
643
 */
644
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && \
645
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
646
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HAVE_AES) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HAVE_GCM) && \
647
    defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA384)
648
#define MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN 48 /* 384 bits */
649
#else
650
#define MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN 32 /* 256 bits */
651
#endif
652
#endif /* !MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN */
653
654
/* Dummy type used only for its size */
655
union mbedtls_ssl_premaster_secret {
656
    unsigned char dummy; /* Make the union non-empty even with SSL disabled */
657
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA_ENABLED)
658
    unsigned char _pms_rsa[48];                         /* RFC 5246 8.1.1 */
659
#endif
660
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_RSA_ENABLED)
661
    unsigned char _pms_dhm[MBEDTLS_MPI_MAX_SIZE];      /* RFC 5246 8.1.2 */
662
#endif
663
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_RSA_ENABLED)    || \
664
    defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_ECDSA_ENABLED)  || \
665
    defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_RSA_ENABLED)     || \
666
    defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_ECDSA_ENABLED)
667
    unsigned char _pms_ecdh[MBEDTLS_ECP_MAX_BYTES];    /* RFC 4492 5.10 */
668
#endif
669
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_PSK_ENABLED)
670
    unsigned char _pms_psk[4 + 2 * MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];       /* RFC 4279 2 */
671
#endif
672
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_PSK_ENABLED)
673
    unsigned char _pms_dhe_psk[4 + MBEDTLS_MPI_MAX_SIZE
674
                               + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];         /* RFC 4279 3 */
675
#endif
676
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA_PSK_ENABLED)
677
    unsigned char _pms_rsa_psk[52 + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];      /* RFC 4279 4 */
678
#endif
679
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_PSK_ENABLED)
680
    unsigned char _pms_ecdhe_psk[4 + MBEDTLS_ECP_MAX_BYTES
681
                                 + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];       /* RFC 5489 2 */
682
#endif
683
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED)
684
    unsigned char _pms_ecjpake[32];     /* Thread spec: SHA-256 output */
685
#endif
686
};
687
688
#define MBEDTLS_PREMASTER_SIZE     sizeof(union mbedtls_ssl_premaster_secret)
689
690
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE         PSA_HASH_MAX_SIZE
691
692
693
/* Length in number of bytes of the TLS sequence number */
694
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SEQUENCE_NUMBER_LEN 8
695
696
#ifdef __cplusplus
697
extern "C" {
698
#endif
699
700
/*
701
 * SSL state machine
702
 */
703
typedef enum {
704
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HELLO_REQUEST,
705
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_HELLO,
706
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO,
707
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CERTIFICATE,
708
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_KEY_EXCHANGE,
709
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CERTIFICATE_REQUEST,
710
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO_DONE,
711
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE,
712
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_KEY_EXCHANGE,
713
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY,
714
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC,
715
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_FINISHED,
716
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC,
717
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_FINISHED,
718
    MBEDTLS_SSL_FLUSH_BUFFERS,
719
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WRAPUP,
720
    MBEDTLS_SSL_NEW_SESSION_TICKET,
721
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUEST_SENT,
722
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HELLO_RETRY_REQUEST,
723
    MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPTED_EXTENSIONS,
724
    MBEDTLS_SSL_END_OF_EARLY_DATA,
725
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY,
726
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_AFTER_SERVER_FINISHED,
727
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_BEFORE_2ND_CLIENT_HELLO,
728
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CCS_AFTER_SERVER_HELLO,
729
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_AFTER_CLIENT_HELLO,
730
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CCS_AFTER_HELLO_RETRY_REQUEST,
731
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_OVER,
732
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_NEW_SESSION_TICKET,
733
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_NEW_SESSION_TICKET_FLUSH,
734
}
735
mbedtls_ssl_states;
736
737
/*
738
 * Early data status, client side only.
739
 */
740
741
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
742
typedef enum {
743
/*
744
 * See documentation of mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status().
745
 */
746
    MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_NOT_INDICATED,
747
    MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_ACCEPTED,
748
    MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_REJECTED,
749
} mbedtls_ssl_early_data_status;
750
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
751
752
/**
753
 * \brief          Callback type: send data on the network.
754
 *
755
 * \note           That callback may be either blocking or non-blocking.
756
 *
757
 * \param ctx      Context for the send callback (typically a file descriptor)
758
 * \param buf      Buffer holding the data to send
759
 * \param len      Length of the data to send
760
 *
761
 * \return         The callback must return the number of bytes sent if any,
762
 *                 or a non-zero error code.
763
 *                 If performing non-blocking I/O, \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
764
 *                 must be returned when the operation would block.
765
 *
766
 * \note           The callback is allowed to send fewer bytes than requested.
767
 *                 It must always return the number of bytes actually sent.
768
 */
769
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_send_t(void *ctx,
770
                               const unsigned char *buf,
771
                               size_t len);
772
773
/**
774
 * \brief          Callback type: receive data from the network.
775
 *
776
 * \note           That callback may be either blocking or non-blocking.
777
 *
778
 * \param ctx      Context for the receive callback (typically a file
779
 *                 descriptor)
780
 * \param buf      Buffer to write the received data to
781
 * \param len      Length of the receive buffer
782
 *
783
 * \returns        If data has been received, the positive number of bytes received.
784
 * \returns        \c 0 if the connection has been closed.
785
 * \returns        If performing non-blocking I/O, \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ
786
 *                 must be returned when the operation would block.
787
 * \returns        Another negative error code on other kinds of failures.
788
 *
789
 * \note           The callback may receive fewer bytes than the length of the
790
 *                 buffer. It must always return the number of bytes actually
791
 *                 received and written to the buffer.
792
 */
793
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_recv_t(void *ctx,
794
                               unsigned char *buf,
795
                               size_t len);
796
797
/**
798
 * \brief          Callback type: receive data from the network, with timeout
799
 *
800
 * \note           That callback must block until data is received, or the
801
 *                 timeout delay expires, or the operation is interrupted by a
802
 *                 signal.
803
 *
804
 * \param ctx      Context for the receive callback (typically a file descriptor)
805
 * \param buf      Buffer to write the received data to
806
 * \param len      Length of the receive buffer
807
 * \param timeout  Maximum number of milliseconds to wait for data
808
 *                 0 means no timeout (potentially waiting forever)
809
 *
810
 * \return         The callback must return the number of bytes received,
811
 *                 or a non-zero error code:
812
 *                 \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_TIMEOUT if the operation timed out,
813
 *                 \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ if interrupted by a signal.
814
 *
815
 * \note           The callback may receive fewer bytes than the length of the
816
 *                 buffer. It must always return the number of bytes actually
817
 *                 received and written to the buffer.
818
 */
819
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t(void *ctx,
820
                                       unsigned char *buf,
821
                                       size_t len,
822
                                       uint32_t timeout);
823
/**
824
 * \brief          Callback type: set a pair of timers/delays to watch
825
 *
826
 * \param ctx      Context pointer
827
 * \param int_ms   Intermediate delay in milliseconds
828
 * \param fin_ms   Final delay in milliseconds
829
 *                 0 cancels the current timer.
830
 *
831
 * \note           This callback must at least store the necessary information
832
 *                 for the associated \c mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t callback to
833
 *                 return correct information.
834
 *
835
 * \note           If using an event-driven style of programming, an event must
836
 *                 be generated when the final delay is passed. The event must
837
 *                 cause a call to \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() with the proper
838
 *                 SSL context to be scheduled. Care must be taken to ensure
839
 *                 that at most one such call happens at a time.
840
 *
841
 * \note           Only one timer at a time must be running. Calling this
842
 *                 function while a timer is running must cancel it. Cancelled
843
 *                 timers must not generate any event.
844
 */
845
typedef void mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t(void *ctx,
846
                                     uint32_t int_ms,
847
                                     uint32_t fin_ms);
848
849
/**
850
 * \brief          Callback type: get status of timers/delays
851
 *
852
 * \param ctx      Context pointer
853
 *
854
 * \return         This callback must return:
855
 *                 -1 if cancelled (fin_ms == 0),
856
 *                  0 if none of the delays have passed,
857
 *                  1 if only the intermediate delay has passed,
858
 *                  2 if the final delay has passed.
859
 */
860
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t(void *ctx);
861
862
/* Defined below */
863
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_session mbedtls_ssl_session;
864
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_context mbedtls_ssl_context;
865
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_config  mbedtls_ssl_config;
866
867
/* Defined in library/ssl_misc.h */
868
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_transform mbedtls_ssl_transform;
869
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params;
870
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_sig_hash_set_t mbedtls_ssl_sig_hash_set_t;
871
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
872
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_key_cert mbedtls_ssl_key_cert;
873
#endif
874
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
875
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_flight_item mbedtls_ssl_flight_item;
876
#endif
877
878
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
879
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_RESUMPTION                          \
880
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK                        /* 1U << 0 */
881
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_EPHEMERAL_RESUMPTION                \
882
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL              /* 1U << 2 */
883
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_EARLY_DATA                  (1U << 3)
884
885
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_FLAGS_MASK                                    \
886
    (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_RESUMPTION             |      \
887
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_EPHEMERAL_RESUMPTION   |      \
888
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_EARLY_DATA)
889
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
890
891
/**
892
 * \brief          Callback type: server-side session cache getter
893
 *
894
 *                 The session cache is logically a key value store, with
895
 *                 keys being session IDs and values being instances of
896
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session.
897
 *
898
 *                 This callback retrieves an entry in this key-value store.
899
 *
900
 * \param data            The address of the session cache structure to query.
901
 * \param session_id      The buffer holding the session ID to query.
902
 * \param session_id_len  The length of \p session_id in Bytes.
903
 * \param session         The address of the session structure to populate.
904
 *                        It is initialized with mbdtls_ssl_session_init(),
905
 *                        and the callback must always leave it in a state
906
 *                        where it can safely be freed via
907
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_session_free() independent of the
908
 *                        return code of this function.
909
 *
910
 * \return                \c 0 on success
911
 * \return                A non-zero return value on failure.
912
 *
913
 */
914
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t(void *data,
915
                                    unsigned char const *session_id,
916
                                    size_t session_id_len,
917
                                    mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
918
/**
919
 * \brief          Callback type: server-side session cache setter
920
 *
921
 *                 The session cache is logically a key value store, with
922
 *                 keys being session IDs and values being instances of
923
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session.
924
 *
925
 *                 This callback sets an entry in this key-value store.
926
 *
927
 * \param data            The address of the session cache structure to modify.
928
 * \param session_id      The buffer holding the session ID to query.
929
 * \param session_id_len  The length of \p session_id in Bytes.
930
 * \param session         The address of the session to be stored in the
931
 *                        session cache.
932
 *
933
 * \return                \c 0 on success
934
 * \return                A non-zero return value on failure.
935
 */
936
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t(void *data,
937
                                    unsigned char const *session_id,
938
                                    size_t session_id_len,
939
                                    const mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
940
941
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
942
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
943
/**
944
 * \brief           Callback type: start external signature operation.
945
 *
946
 *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to start
947
 *                  a signature decryption operation using an
948
 *                  external processor. The parameter \p cert contains
949
 *                  the public key; it is up to the callback function to
950
 *                  determine how to access the associated private key.
951
 *
952
 *                  This function typically sends or enqueues a request, and
953
 *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
954
 *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
955
 *
956
 *                  The parameters \p ssl and \p cert are guaranteed to remain
957
 *                  valid throughout the handshake. On the other hand, this
958
 *                  function must save the contents of \p hash if the value
959
 *                  is needed for later processing, because the \p hash buffer
960
 *                  is no longer valid after this function returns.
961
 *
962
 *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data()
963
 *                  to store an operation context for later retrieval
964
 *                  by the resume or cancel callback.
965
 *
966
 * \note            For RSA signatures, this function must produce output
967
 *                  that is consistent with PKCS#1 v1.5 in the same way as
968
 *                  mbedtls_rsa_pkcs1_sign(). Before the private key operation,
969
 *                  apply the padding steps described in RFC 8017, section 9.2
970
 *                  "EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5" as follows.
971
 *                  - If \p md_alg is #MBEDTLS_MD_NONE, apply the PKCS#1 v1.5
972
 *                    encoding, treating \p hash as the DigestInfo to be
973
 *                    padded. In other words, apply EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5 starting
974
 *                    from step 3, with `T = hash` and `tLen = hash_len`.
975
 *                  - If `md_alg != MBEDTLS_MD_NONE`, apply the PKCS#1 v1.5
976
 *                    encoding, treating \p hash as the hash to be encoded and
977
 *                    padded. In other words, apply EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5 starting
978
 *                    from step 2, with `digestAlgorithm` obtained by calling
979
 *                    mbedtls_oid_get_oid_by_md() on \p md_alg.
980
 *
981
 * \note            For ECDSA signatures, the output format is the DER encoding
982
 *                  `Ecdsa-Sig-Value` defined in
983
 *                  [RFC 4492 section 5.4](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4492#section-5.4).
984
 *
985
 * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
986
 *                        modified other than via
987
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
988
 * \param cert            Certificate containing the public key.
989
 *                        In simple cases, this is one of the pointers passed to
990
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() when configuring the SSL
991
 *                        connection. However, if other callbacks are used, this
992
 *                        property may not hold. For example, if an SNI callback
993
 *                        is registered with mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(), then
994
 *                        this callback determines what certificate is used.
995
 * \param md_alg          Hash algorithm.
996
 * \param hash            Buffer containing the hash. This buffer is
997
 *                        no longer valid when the function returns.
998
 * \param hash_len        Size of the \c hash buffer in bytes.
999
 *
1000
 * \return          0 if the operation was started successfully and the SSL
1001
 *                  stack should call the resume callback immediately.
1002
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1003
 *                  was started successfully and the SSL stack should return
1004
 *                  immediately without calling the resume callback yet.
1005
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH if the external
1006
 *                  processor does not support this key. The SSL stack will
1007
 *                  use the private key object instead.
1008
 * \return          Any other error indicates a fatal failure and is
1009
 *                  propagated up the call chain. The callback should
1010
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1011
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1012
 *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1013
 */
1014
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1015
                                     mbedtls_x509_crt *cert,
1016
                                     mbedtls_md_type_t md_alg,
1017
                                     const unsigned char *hash,
1018
                                     size_t hash_len);
1019
1020
/**
1021
 * \brief           Callback type: start external decryption operation.
1022
 *
1023
 *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to start
1024
 *                  an RSA decryption operation using an
1025
 *                  external processor. The parameter \p cert contains
1026
 *                  the public key; it is up to the callback function to
1027
 *                  determine how to access the associated private key.
1028
 *
1029
 *                  This function typically sends or enqueues a request, and
1030
 *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
1031
 *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
1032
 *
1033
 *                  The parameters \p ssl and \p cert are guaranteed to remain
1034
 *                  valid throughout the handshake. On the other hand, this
1035
 *                  function must save the contents of \p input if the value
1036
 *                  is needed for later processing, because the \p input buffer
1037
 *                  is no longer valid after this function returns.
1038
 *
1039
 *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data()
1040
 *                  to store an operation context for later retrieval
1041
 *                  by the resume or cancel callback.
1042
 *
1043
 * \warning         RSA decryption as used in TLS is subject to a potential
1044
 *                  timing side channel attack first discovered by Bleichenbacher
1045
 *                  in 1998. This attack can be remotely exploitable
1046
 *                  in practice. To avoid this attack, you must ensure that
1047
 *                  if the callback performs an RSA decryption, the time it
1048
 *                  takes to execute and return the result does not depend
1049
 *                  on whether the RSA decryption succeeded or reported
1050
 *                  invalid padding.
1051
 *
1052
 * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1053
 *                        modified other than via
1054
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
1055
 * \param cert            Certificate containing the public key.
1056
 *                        In simple cases, this is one of the pointers passed to
1057
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() when configuring the SSL
1058
 *                        connection. However, if other callbacks are used, this
1059
 *                        property may not hold. For example, if an SNI callback
1060
 *                        is registered with mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(), then
1061
 *                        this callback determines what certificate is used.
1062
 * \param input           Buffer containing the input ciphertext. This buffer
1063
 *                        is no longer valid when the function returns.
1064
 * \param input_len       Size of the \p input buffer in bytes.
1065
 *
1066
 * \return          0 if the operation was started successfully and the SSL
1067
 *                  stack should call the resume callback immediately.
1068
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1069
 *                  was started successfully and the SSL stack should return
1070
 *                  immediately without calling the resume callback yet.
1071
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH if the external
1072
 *                  processor does not support this key. The SSL stack will
1073
 *                  use the private key object instead.
1074
 * \return          Any other error indicates a fatal failure and is
1075
 *                  propagated up the call chain. The callback should
1076
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1077
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1078
 *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1079
 */
1080
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1081
                                        mbedtls_x509_crt *cert,
1082
                                        const unsigned char *input,
1083
                                        size_t input_len);
1084
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1085
1086
/**
1087
 * \brief           Callback type: resume external operation.
1088
 *
1089
 *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to resume
1090
 *                  an external operation started by the
1091
 *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t or
1092
 *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t callback.
1093
 *
1094
 *                  This function typically checks the status of a pending
1095
 *                  request or causes the request queue to make progress, and
1096
 *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
1097
 *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
1098
 *
1099
 *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data()
1100
 *                  to retrieve an operation context set by the start callback.
1101
 *                  It may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data() to modify
1102
 *                  this context.
1103
 *
1104
 *                  Note that when this function returns a status other than
1105
 *                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS, it must free any
1106
 *                  resources associated with the operation.
1107
 *
1108
 * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1109
 *                        modified other than via
1110
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
1111
 * \param output          Buffer containing the output (signature or decrypted
1112
 *                        data) on success.
1113
 * \param output_len      On success, number of bytes written to \p output.
1114
 * \param output_size     Size of the \p output buffer in bytes.
1115
 *
1116
 * \return          0 if output of the operation is available in the
1117
 *                  \p output buffer.
1118
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1119
 *                  is still in progress. Subsequent requests for progress
1120
 *                  on the SSL connection will call the resume callback
1121
 *                  again.
1122
 * \return          Any other error means that the operation is aborted.
1123
 *                  The SSL handshake is aborted. The callback should
1124
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1125
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1126
 *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1127
 */
1128
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1129
                                       unsigned char *output,
1130
                                       size_t *output_len,
1131
                                       size_t output_size);
1132
1133
/**
1134
 * \brief           Callback type: cancel external operation.
1135
 *
1136
 *                  This callback is called if an SSL connection is closed
1137
 *                  while an asynchronous operation is in progress. Note that
1138
 *                  this callback is not called if the
1139
 *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t callback has run and has
1140
 *                  returned a value other than
1141
 *                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS, since in that case
1142
 *                  the asynchronous operation has already completed.
1143
 *
1144
 *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data()
1145
 *                  to retrieve an operation context set by the start callback.
1146
 *
1147
 * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1148
 *                        modified.
1149
 */
1150
typedef void mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
1151
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
1152
1153
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED) &&        \
1154
    !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE)
1155
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_MAX_LEN  48
1156
#if defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA256)
1157
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA256
1158
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  32
1159
#elif defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA384)
1160
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA384
1161
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  48
1162
#elif defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA1)
1163
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA1
1164
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  20
1165
#else
1166
/* This is already checked in check_config.h, but be sure. */
1167
#error "Bad configuration - need SHA-1, SHA-256 or SHA-512 enabled to compute digest of peer CRT."
1168
#endif
1169
#endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED &&
1170
          !MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1171
1172
typedef struct {
1173
    unsigned char client_application_traffic_secret_N[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1174
    unsigned char server_application_traffic_secret_N[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1175
    unsigned char exporter_master_secret[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1176
    unsigned char resumption_master_secret[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1177
} mbedtls_ssl_tls13_application_secrets;
1178
1179
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1180
1181
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_MKI_LENGTH             255
1182
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_PROFILE_LIST_LENGTH    4
1183
/*
1184
 * For code readability use a typedef for DTLS-SRTP profiles
1185
 *
1186
 * Use_srtp extension protection profiles values as defined in
1187
 * http://www.iana.org/assignments/srtp-protection/srtp-protection.xhtml
1188
 *
1189
 * Reminder: if this list is expanded mbedtls_ssl_check_srtp_profile_value
1190
 * must be updated too.
1191
 */
1192
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80     ((uint16_t) 0x0001)
1193
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32     ((uint16_t) 0x0002)
1194
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80          ((uint16_t) 0x0005)
1195
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32          ((uint16_t) 0x0006)
1196
/* This one is not iana defined, but for code readability. */
1197
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET                      ((uint16_t) 0x0000)
1198
1199
typedef uint16_t mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile;
1200
1201
typedef struct mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info_t {
1202
    /*! The SRTP profile that was negotiated. */
1203
    mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(chosen_dtls_srtp_profile);
1204
    /*! The length of mki_value. */
1205
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mki_len);
1206
    /*! The mki_value used, with max size of 256 bytes. */
1207
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mki_value)[MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_MKI_LENGTH];
1208
}
1209
mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info;
1210
1211
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1212
1213
/** Human-friendly representation of the (D)TLS protocol version. */
1214
typedef enum {
1215
    MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN, /*!< Context not in use or version not yet negotiated. */
1216
    MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_TLS1_2 = 0x0303, /*!< (D)TLS 1.2 */
1217
    MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_TLS1_3 = 0x0304, /*!< (D)TLS 1.3 */
1218
} mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version;
1219
1220
/*
1221
 * This structure is used for storing current session data.
1222
 *
1223
 * Note: when changing this definition, we need to check and update:
1224
 *  - in tests/suites/test_suite_ssl.function:
1225
 *      ssl_populate_session() and ssl_serialize_session_save_load()
1226
 *  - in library/ssl_tls.c:
1227
 *      mbedtls_ssl_session_init() and mbedtls_ssl_session_free()
1228
 *      mbedtls_ssl_session_save() and ssl_session_load()
1229
 *      ssl_session_copy()
1230
 */
1231
struct mbedtls_ssl_session {
1232
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
1233
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mfl_code);     /*!< MaxFragmentLength negotiated by peer */
1234
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH */
1235
1236
/*!< RecordSizeLimit received from the peer */
1237
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT)
1238
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(record_size_limit);
1239
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT */
1240
1241
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(exported);
1242
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);          /*!< 0: client, 1: server */
1243
1244
    /** TLS version negotiated in the session. Used if and when renegotiating
1245
     *  or resuming a session instead of the configured minor TLS version.
1246
     */
1247
    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
1248
1249
#if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
1250
    mbedtls_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(start);       /*!< start time of current session */
1251
#endif
1252
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite);            /*!< chosen ciphersuite */
1253
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id_len);              /*!< session id length  */
1254
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id)[32];       /*!< session identifier */
1255
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(master)[48];   /*!< the master secret  */
1256
1257
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1258
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE)
1259
    mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert);       /*!< peer X.509 cert chain */
1260
#else /* MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1261
    /*! The digest of the peer's end-CRT. This must be kept to detect CRT
1262
     *  changes during renegotiation, mitigating the triple handshake attack. */
1263
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest);
1264
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest_len);
1265
    mbedtls_md_type_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest_type);
1266
#endif /* !MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1267
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1268
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(verify_result);          /*!<  verification result     */
1269
1270
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1271
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket);      /*!< RFC 5077 session ticket */
1272
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_len);          /*!< session ticket length   */
1273
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_lifetime);   /*!< ticket lifetime hint    */
1274
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
1275
1276
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
1277
    defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
1278
    /*! When a ticket is created by a TLS server as part of an established TLS
1279
     *  session, the ticket creation time may need to be saved for the ticket
1280
     *  module to be able to check the ticket age when the ticket is used.
1281
     *  That's the purpose of this field.
1282
     *  Before creating a new ticket, an Mbed TLS server set this field with
1283
     *  its current time in milliseconds. This time may then be saved in the
1284
     *  session ticket data by the session ticket writing function and
1285
     *  recovered by the ticket parsing function later when the ticket is used.
1286
     *  The ticket module may then use this time to compute the ticket age and
1287
     *  determine if it has expired or not.
1288
     *  The Mbed TLS implementations of the session ticket writing and parsing
1289
     *  functions save and retrieve the ticket creation time as part of the
1290
     *  session ticket data. The session ticket parsing function relies on
1291
     *  the mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ticket_creation_time() API to get the
1292
     *  ticket creation time from the session ticket data.
1293
     */
1294
    mbedtls_ms_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_creation_time);
1295
#endif
1296
1297
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
1298
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_age_add);     /*!< Randomly generated value used to obscure the age of the ticket */
1299
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_flags);        /*!< Ticket flags */
1300
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(resumption_key_len);  /*!< resumption_key length */
1301
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(resumption_key)[MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN];
1302
1303
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1304
    char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);             /*!< host name binded with tickets */
1305
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
1306
1307
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1308
    char *ticket_alpn;                      /*!< ALPN negotiated in the session
1309
                                                 during which the ticket was generated. */
1310
#endif
1311
1312
#if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1313
    /*! Time in milliseconds when the last ticket was received. */
1314
    mbedtls_ms_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_reception_time);
1315
#endif
1316
#endif /*  MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
1317
1318
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1319
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_early_data_size);          /*!< maximum amount of early data in tickets */
1320
#endif
1321
1322
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
1323
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(encrypt_then_mac);       /*!< flag for EtM activation                */
1324
#endif
1325
1326
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1327
    mbedtls_ssl_tls13_application_secrets MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(app_secrets);
1328
#endif
1329
};
1330
1331
/*
1332
 * Identifiers for PRFs used in various versions of TLS.
1333
 */
1334
typedef enum {
1335
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_NONE,
1336
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_SHA384,
1337
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_SHA256,
1338
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HKDF_EXPAND_SHA384,
1339
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HKDF_EXPAND_SHA256
1340
}
1341
mbedtls_tls_prf_types;
1342
1343
typedef enum {
1344
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS12_MASTER_SECRET = 0,
1345
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1346
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_EARLY_SECRET,
1347
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_EARLY_EXPORTER_SECRET,
1348
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_HANDSHAKE_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1349
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_SERVER_HANDSHAKE_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1350
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_APPLICATION_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1351
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_SERVER_APPLICATION_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1352
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1353
} mbedtls_ssl_key_export_type;
1354
1355
/**
1356
 * \brief           Callback type: Export key alongside random values for
1357
 *                                 session identification, and PRF for
1358
 *                                 implementation of TLS key exporters.
1359
 *
1360
 * \param p_expkey   Context for the callback.
1361
 * \param type       The type of the key that is being exported.
1362
 * \param secret     The address of the buffer holding the secret
1363
 *                   that's being exporterd.
1364
 * \param secret_len The length of \p secret in bytes.
1365
 * \param client_random The client random bytes.
1366
 * \param server_random The server random bytes.
1367
 * \param tls_prf_type The identifier for the PRF used in the handshake
1368
 *                     to which the key belongs.
1369
 */
1370
typedef void mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t(void *p_expkey,
1371
                                       mbedtls_ssl_key_export_type type,
1372
                                       const unsigned char *secret,
1373
                                       size_t secret_len,
1374
                                       const unsigned char client_random[32],
1375
                                       const unsigned char server_random[32],
1376
                                       mbedtls_tls_prf_types tls_prf_type);
1377
1378
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1379
/**
1380
 * \brief           Callback type: generic handshake callback
1381
 *
1382
 * \note            Callbacks may use user_data funcs to set/get app user data.
1383
 *                  See \c mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p()
1384
 *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n()
1385
 *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p()
1386
 *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n()
1387
 *
1388
 * \param ssl       \c mbedtls_ssl_context on which the callback is run
1389
 *
1390
 * \return          The return value of the callback is 0 if successful,
1391
 *                  or a specific MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX code, which will cause
1392
 *                  the handshake to be aborted.
1393
 */
1394
typedef int (*mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t)(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
1395
#endif
1396
1397
/* A type for storing user data in a library structure.
1398
 *
1399
 * The representation of type may change in future versions of the library.
1400
 * Only the behaviors guaranteed by documented accessor functions are
1401
 * guaranteed to remain stable.
1402
 */
1403
typedef union {
1404
    uintptr_t n;                /* typically a handle to an associated object */
1405
    void *p;                    /* typically a pointer to extra data */
1406
} mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t;
1407
1408
/**
1409
 * SSL/TLS configuration to be shared between mbedtls_ssl_context structures.
1410
 */
1411
struct mbedtls_ssl_config {
1412
    /* Group items mostly by size. This helps to reduce memory wasted to
1413
     * padding. It also helps to keep smaller fields early in the structure,
1414
     * so that elements tend to be in the 128-element direct access window
1415
     * on Arm Thumb, which reduces the code size. */
1416
1417
    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_tls_version);  /*!< max. TLS version used */
1418
    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(min_tls_version);  /*!< min. TLS version used */
1419
1420
    /*
1421
     * Flags (could be bit-fields to save RAM, but separate bytes make
1422
     * the code smaller on architectures with an instruction for direct
1423
     * byte access).
1424
     */
1425
1426
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);      /*!< 0: client, 1: server               */
1427
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transport);     /*!< 0: stream (TLS), 1: datagram (DTLS)    */
1428
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(authmode);      /*!< MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_XXX             */
1429
    /* needed even with renego disabled for LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE          */
1430
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(allow_legacy_renegotiation); /*!< MBEDTLS_LEGACY_XXX   */
1431
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
1432
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mfl_code);      /*!< desired fragment length indicator
1433
                                                 (MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_XXX) */
1434
#endif
1435
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
1436
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(encrypt_then_mac); /*!< negotiate encrypt-then-mac?    */
1437
#endif
1438
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET)
1439
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(extended_ms);   /*!< negotiate extended master secret?  */
1440
#endif
1441
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
1442
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(anti_replay);   /*!< detect and prevent replay?         */
1443
#endif
1444
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1445
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(disable_renegotiation); /*!< disable renegotiation?     */
1446
#endif
1447
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
1448
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1449
    /** Encodes two booleans, one stating whether TLS 1.2 session tickets are
1450
     *  enabled or not, the other one whether the handling of TLS 1.3
1451
     *  NewSessionTicket messages is enabled or not. They are respectively set
1452
     *  by mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets() and
1453
     *  mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets().
1454
     */
1455
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_tickets);   /*!< use session tickets? */
1456
#endif
1457
1458
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
1459
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
1460
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1461
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(new_session_tickets_count);   /*!< number of NewSessionTicket */
1462
#endif
1463
1464
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1465
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cert_req_ca_list);  /*!< enable sending CA list in
1466
                                                     Certificate Request messages? */
1467
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(respect_cli_pref);  /*!< pick the ciphersuite according to
1468
                                                     the client's preferences rather
1469
                                                     than ours? */
1470
#endif
1471
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1472
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ignore_unexpected_cid); /*!< Should DTLS record with
1473
                                                     *   unexpected CID
1474
                                                     *   lead to failure? */
1475
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1476
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1477
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_mki_support); /* support having mki_value
1478
                                                       in the use_srtp extension? */
1479
#endif
1480
1481
    /*
1482
     * Pointers
1483
     */
1484
1485
    /** Allowed ciphersuites for (D)TLS 1.2 (0-terminated)                  */
1486
    const int *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite_list);
1487
1488
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1489
    /** Allowed TLS 1.3 key exchange modes.                                 */
1490
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls13_kex_modes);
1491
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1492
1493
    /** Callback for printing debug output                                  */
1494
    void(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_dbg))(void *, int, const char *, int, const char *);
1495
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_dbg);                    /*!< context for the debug function     */
1496
1497
    /** Callback for getting (pseudo-)random numbers                        */
1498
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_rng))(void *, unsigned char *, size_t);
1499
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_rng);                    /*!< context for the RNG function       */
1500
1501
    /** Callback to retrieve a session from the cache                       */
1502
    mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_get_cache);
1503
    /** Callback to store a session into the cache                          */
1504
    mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_set_cache);
1505
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_cache);                  /*!< context for cache callbacks        */
1506
1507
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION)
1508
    /** Callback for setting cert according to SNI extension                */
1509
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_sni))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *, size_t);
1510
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_sni);                    /*!< context for SNI callback           */
1511
#endif
1512
1513
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1514
    /** Callback to customize X.509 certificate chain verification          */
1515
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_vrfy))(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *);
1516
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_vrfy);                   /*!< context for X.509 verify calllback */
1517
#endif
1518
1519
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
1520
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1521
    /** Callback to retrieve PSK key from identity                          */
1522
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_psk))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *, size_t);
1523
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_psk);                    /*!< context for PSK callback           */
1524
#endif
1525
#endif
1526
1527
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1528
    /** Callback to create & write a cookie for ClientHello verification    */
1529
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cookie_write))(void *, unsigned char **, unsigned char *,
1530
                                          const unsigned char *, size_t);
1531
    /** Callback to verify validity of a ClientHello cookie                 */
1532
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cookie_check))(void *, const unsigned char *, size_t,
1533
                                          const unsigned char *, size_t);
1534
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_cookie);                 /*!< context for the cookie callbacks   */
1535
#endif
1536
1537
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1538
    /** Callback to create & write a session ticket                         */
1539
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ticket_write))(void *, const mbedtls_ssl_session *,
1540
                                          unsigned char *, const unsigned char *, size_t *,
1541
                                          uint32_t *);
1542
    /** Callback to parse a session ticket into a session structure         */
1543
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ticket_parse))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_session *, unsigned char *, size_t);
1544
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_ticket);                 /*!< context for the ticket callbacks   */
1545
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1546
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1547
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cid_len); /*!< The length of CIDs for incoming DTLS records.      */
1548
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1549
1550
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1551
    const mbedtls_x509_crt_profile *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cert_profile); /*!< verification profile */
1552
    mbedtls_ssl_key_cert *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(key_cert); /*!< own certificate/key pair(s)        */
1553
    mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ca_chain);     /*!< trusted CAs                        */
1554
    mbedtls_x509_crl *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ca_crl);       /*!< trusted CAs CRLs                   */
1555
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK)
1556
    mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ca_cb);
1557
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_ca_cb);
1558
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK */
1559
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1560
1561
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
1562
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1563
    mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_sign_start); /*!< start asynchronous signature operation */
1564
    mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_decrypt_start); /*!< start asynchronous decryption operation */
1565
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1566
    mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_resume); /*!< resume asynchronous operation */
1567
    mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_cancel); /*!< cancel asynchronous operation */
1568
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_async_config_data); /*!< Configuration data set by mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb(). */
1569
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
1570
1571
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED)
1572
1573
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
1574
    const int *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(sig_hashes);         /*!< allowed signature hashes           */
1575
#endif
1576
    const uint16_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(sig_algs);      /*!< allowed signature algorithms       */
1577
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED */
1578
1579
#if defined(MBEDTLS_ECP_C) && !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
1580
    const mbedtls_ecp_group_id *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(curve_list); /*!< allowed curves             */
1581
#endif
1582
1583
    const uint16_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(group_list);     /*!< allowed IANA NamedGroups */
1584
1585
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C)
1586
    mbedtls_mpi MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_P);              /*!< prime modulus for DHM              */
1587
    mbedtls_mpi MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_G);              /*!< generator for DHM                  */
1588
#endif
1589
1590
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
1591
1592
#if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
1593
    mbedtls_svc_key_id_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_opaque); /*!< PSA key slot holding opaque PSK. This field
1594
                                                       *   should only be set via
1595
                                                       *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
1596
                                                       *   If either no PSK or a raw PSK have been
1597
                                                       *   configured, this has value \c 0.
1598
                                                       */
1599
#endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
1600
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk);      /*!< The raw pre-shared key. This field should
1601
                                               *   only be set via mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1602
                                               *   If either no PSK or an opaque PSK
1603
                                               *   have been configured, this has value NULL. */
1604
    size_t         MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_len);  /*!< The length of the raw pre-shared key.
1605
                                               *   This field should only be set via
1606
                                               *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1607
                                               *   Its value is non-zero if and only if
1608
                                               *   \c psk is not \c NULL. */
1609
1610
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_identity);    /*!< The PSK identity for PSK negotiation.
1611
                                                      *   This field should only be set via
1612
                                                      *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1613
                                                      *   This is set if and only if either
1614
                                                      *   \c psk or \c psk_opaque are set. */
1615
    size_t         MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_identity_len);/*!< The length of PSK identity.
1616
                                                      *   This field should only be set via
1617
                                                      *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1618
                                                      *   Its value is non-zero if and only if
1619
                                                      *   \c psk is not \c NULL or \c psk_opaque
1620
                                                      *   is not \c 0. */
1621
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED */
1622
1623
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1624
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(early_data_enabled);     /*!< Early data enablement:
1625
                                                  *   - MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED,
1626
                                                  *   - MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED */
1627
1628
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1629
    /* The maximum amount of 0-RTT data. RFC 8446 section 4.6.1 */
1630
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_early_data_size);
1631
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1632
1633
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
1634
1635
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
1636
    const char **MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alpn_list);         /*!< ordered list of protocols          */
1637
#endif
1638
1639
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1640
    /*! ordered list of supported srtp profile */
1641
    const mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_profile_list);
1642
    /*! number of supported profiles */
1643
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_profile_list_len);
1644
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1645
1646
    /*
1647
     * Numerical settings (int)
1648
     */
1649
1650
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(read_timeout);          /*!< timeout for mbedtls_ssl_read (ms)  */
1651
1652
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1653
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hs_timeout_min);        /*!< initial value of the handshake
1654
                                                        retransmission timeout (ms)        */
1655
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hs_timeout_max);        /*!< maximum value of the handshake
1656
                                                        retransmission timeout (ms)        */
1657
#endif
1658
1659
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1660
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_max_records);         /*!< grace period for renegotiation     */
1661
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_period)[8]; /*!< value of the record counters
1662
                                                        that triggers renegotiation        */
1663
#endif
1664
1665
    unsigned int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(badmac_limit);      /*!< limit of records with a bad MAC    */
1666
1667
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1668
    unsigned int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_min_bitlen);    /*!< min. bit length of the DHM prime   */
1669
#endif
1670
1671
    /** User data pointer or handle.
1672
     *
1673
     * The library sets this to \p 0 when creating a context and does not
1674
     * access it afterwards.
1675
     */
1676
    mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data);
1677
1678
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1679
    mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cert_cb);  /*!< certificate selection callback */
1680
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1681
1682
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
1683
    const mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dn_hints);/*!< acceptable client cert issuers    */
1684
#endif
1685
};
1686
1687
struct mbedtls_ssl_context {
1688
    const mbedtls_ssl_config *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(conf); /*!< configuration information          */
1689
1690
    /*
1691
     * Miscellaneous
1692
     */
1693
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state);                  /*!< SSL handshake: current state     */
1694
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1695
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_status);          /*!< Initial, in progress, pending?   */
1696
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_records_seen);    /*!< Records since renego request, or with DTLS,
1697
                                                    number of retransmissions of request if
1698
                                                    renego_max_records is < 0           */
1699
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
1700
1701
    /**
1702
     * Maximum TLS version to be negotiated, then negotiated TLS version.
1703
     *
1704
     * It is initialized as the configured maximum TLS version to be
1705
     * negotiated by mbedtls_ssl_setup().
1706
     *
1707
     * When renegotiating or resuming a session, it is overwritten in the
1708
     * ClientHello writing preparation stage with the previously negotiated
1709
     * TLS version.
1710
     *
1711
     * On client side, it is updated to the TLS version selected by the server
1712
     * for the handshake when the ServerHello is received.
1713
     *
1714
     * On server side, it is updated to the TLS version the server selects for
1715
     * the handshake when the ClientHello is received.
1716
     */
1717
    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
1718
1719
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1720
    /**
1721
     * State of the negotiation and transfer of early data. Reset to
1722
     * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATE_IDLE when the context is reset.
1723
     */
1724
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(early_data_state);
1725
#endif
1726
1727
    unsigned MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(badmac_seen);       /*!< records with a bad MAC received    */
1728
1729
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1730
    /** Callback to customize X.509 certificate chain verification          */
1731
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_vrfy))(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *);
1732
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_vrfy);                   /*!< context for X.509 verify callback */
1733
#endif
1734
1735
    mbedtls_ssl_send_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_send); /*!< Callback for network send */
1736
    mbedtls_ssl_recv_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_recv); /*!< Callback for network receive */
1737
    mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_recv_timeout);
1738
    /*!< Callback for network receive with timeout */
1739
1740
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_bio);                /*!< context for I/O operations   */
1741
1742
    /*
1743
     * Session layer
1744
     */
1745
    mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_in);            /*!<  current session data (in)   */
1746
    mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_out);           /*!<  current session data (out)  */
1747
    mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session);               /*!<  negotiated session data     */
1748
    mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_negotiate);     /*!<  session data in negotiation */
1749
1750
    mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(handshake);    /*!<  params required only during
1751
                                                                    the handshake process        */
1752
1753
    /*
1754
     * Record layer transformations
1755
     */
1756
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_in);        /*!<  current transform params (in)
1757
                                                                  *    This is always a reference,
1758
                                                                  *    never an owning pointer.        */
1759
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_out);       /*!<  current transform params (out)
1760
                                                                  *    This is always a reference,
1761
                                                                  *    never an owning pointer.        */
1762
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform);           /*!<  negotiated transform params
1763
                                                                  *    This pointer owns the transform
1764
                                                                  *    it references.                  */
1765
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2)
1766
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_negotiate); /*!<  transform params in negotiation
1767
                                                                  *    This pointer owns the transform
1768
                                                                  *    it references.                  */
1769
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2 */
1770
1771
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1772
    /*! The application data transform in TLS 1.3.
1773
     *  This pointer owns the transform it references. */
1774
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_application);
1775
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1776
1777
    /*
1778
     * Timers
1779
     */
1780
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_timer);              /*!< context for the timer callbacks */
1781
1782
    mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_set_timer);       /*!< set timer callback */
1783
    mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_get_timer);       /*!< get timer callback */
1784
1785
    /*
1786
     * Record layer (incoming data)
1787
     */
1788
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_buf);      /*!< input buffer                     */
1789
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_ctr);      /*!< 64-bit incoming message counter
1790
                                                    TLS: maintained by us
1791
                                                    DTLS: read from peer             */
1792
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_hdr);      /*!< start of record header           */
1793
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1794
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_cid);      /*!< The start of the CID;
1795
                                                  *   (the end is marked by in_len).   */
1796
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1797
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_len);      /*!< two-bytes message length field   */
1798
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_iv);       /*!< ivlen-byte IV                    */
1799
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msg);      /*!< message contents (in_iv+ivlen)   */
1800
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_offt);     /*!< read offset in application data  */
1801
1802
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msgtype);             /*!< record header: message type      */
1803
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msglen);           /*!< record header: message length    */
1804
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_left);             /*!< amount of data read so far       */
1805
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_VARIABLE_BUFFER_LENGTH)
1806
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_buf_len);          /*!< length of input buffer           */
1807
#endif
1808
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1809
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_epoch);          /*!< DTLS epoch for incoming records  */
1810
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(next_record_offset);  /*!< offset of the next record in datagram
1811
                                                    (equal to in_left if none)       */
1812
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1813
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
1814
    uint64_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_window_top);     /*!< last validated record seq_num    */
1815
    uint64_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_window);         /*!< bitmask for replay detection     */
1816
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY */
1817
1818
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_hslen);            /*!< current handshake message length,
1819
                                                    including the handshake header   */
1820
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(nb_zero);                /*!< # of 0-length encrypted messages */
1821
1822
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(keep_current_message);   /*!< drop or reuse current message
1823
                                                    on next call to record layer? */
1824
1825
    /* The following three variables indicate if and, if yes,
1826
     * what kind of alert is pending to be sent.
1827
     */
1828
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(send_alert);   /*!< Determines if a fatal alert
1829
                                                    should be sent. Values:
1830
                                                    - \c 0 , no alert is to be sent.
1831
                                                    - \c 1 , alert is to be sent. */
1832
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alert_type);   /*!< Type of alert if send_alert
1833
                                                    != 0 */
1834
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alert_reason);           /*!< The error code to be returned
1835
                                                    to the user once the fatal alert
1836
                                                    has been sent. */
1837
1838
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1839
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(disable_datagram_packing);  /*!< Disable packing multiple records
1840
                                                         *   within a single datagram.  */
1841
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1842
1843
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1844
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1845
    /*
1846
     * One of:
1847
     * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_NO_DISCARD
1848
     * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_TRY_TO_DEPROTECT_AND_DISCARD
1849
     * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISCARD
1850
     */
1851
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(discard_early_data_record);
1852
#endif
1853
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(total_early_data_size); /*!< Number of received/written early data bytes */
1854
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
1855
1856
    /*
1857
     * Record layer (outgoing data)
1858
     */
1859
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_buf);     /*!< output buffer                    */
1860
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_ctr);     /*!< 64-bit outgoing message counter  */
1861
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_hdr);     /*!< start of record header           */
1862
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1863
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_cid);     /*!< The start of the CID;
1864
                                                  *   (the end is marked by in_len).   */
1865
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1866
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_len);     /*!< two-bytes message length field   */
1867
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_iv);      /*!< ivlen-byte IV                    */
1868
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msg);     /*!< message contents (out_iv+ivlen)  */
1869
1870
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msgtype);            /*!< record header: message type      */
1871
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msglen);          /*!< record header: message length    */
1872
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_left);            /*!< amount of data not yet written   */
1873
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_VARIABLE_BUFFER_LENGTH)
1874
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_buf_len);         /*!< length of output buffer          */
1875
#endif
1876
1877
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cur_out_ctr)[MBEDTLS_SSL_SEQUENCE_NUMBER_LEN]; /*!<  Outgoing record sequence  number. */
1878
1879
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1880
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mtu);               /*!< path mtu, used to fragment outgoing messages */
1881
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1882
1883
    /*
1884
     * User settings
1885
     */
1886
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1887
    char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);             /*!< expected peer CN for verification
1888
                                                    (and SNI if available)                 */
1889
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1890
1891
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
1892
    const char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alpn_chosen);    /*!<  negotiated protocol                   */
1893
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN */
1894
1895
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1896
    /*
1897
     * use_srtp extension
1898
     */
1899
    mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_info);
1900
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1901
1902
    /*
1903
     * Information for DTLS hello verify
1904
     */
1905
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1906
    unsigned char  *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cli_id);         /*!<  transport-level ID of the client  */
1907
    size_t          MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cli_id_len);     /*!<  length of cli_id                  */
1908
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1909
1910
    /*
1911
     * Secure renegotiation
1912
     */
1913
    /* needed to know when to send extension on server */
1914
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(secure_renegotiation);           /*!<  does peer support legacy or
1915
                                                            secure renegotiation           */
1916
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1917
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(verify_data_len);             /*!<  length of verify data stored   */
1918
    char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_verify_data)[MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN]; /*!<  previous handshake verify data */
1919
    char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_verify_data)[MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN]; /*!<  previous handshake verify data */
1920
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
1921
1922
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1923
    /* CID configuration to use in subsequent handshakes. */
1924
1925
    /*! The next incoming CID, chosen by the user and applying to
1926
     *  all subsequent handshakes. This may be different from the
1927
     *  CID currently used in case the user has re-configured the CID
1928
     *  after an initial handshake. */
1929
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_cid)[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX];
1930
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_cid_len);   /*!< The length of \c own_cid. */
1931
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(negotiate_cid); /*!< This indicates whether the CID extension should
1932
                                             *   be negotiated in the next handshake or not.
1933
                                             *   Possible values are #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED
1934
                                             *   and #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED. */
1935
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1936
1937
    /** Callback to export key block and master secret                      */
1938
    mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_export_keys);
1939
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_export_keys);            /*!< context for key export callback    */
1940
1941
    /** User data pointer or handle.
1942
     *
1943
     * The library sets this to \p 0 when creating a context and does not
1944
     * access it afterwards.
1945
     *
1946
     * \warning Serializing and restoring an SSL context with
1947
     *          mbedtls_ssl_context_save() and mbedtls_ssl_context_load()
1948
     *          does not currently restore the user data.
1949
     */
1950
    mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data);
1951
};
1952
1953
/**
1954
 * \brief               Return the name of the ciphersuite associated with the
1955
 *                      given ID
1956
 *
1957
 * \param ciphersuite_id SSL ciphersuite ID
1958
 *
1959
 * \return              a string containing the ciphersuite name
1960
 */
1961
const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_name(const int ciphersuite_id);
1962
1963
/**
1964
 * \brief               Return the ID of the ciphersuite associated with the
1965
 *                      given name
1966
 *
1967
 * \param ciphersuite_name SSL ciphersuite name
1968
 *
1969
 * \return              the ID with the ciphersuite or 0 if not found
1970
 */
1971
int mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_id(const char *ciphersuite_name);
1972
1973
/**
1974
 * \brief          Initialize an SSL context
1975
 *                 Just makes the context ready for mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
1976
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_free()
1977
 *
1978
 * \param ssl      SSL context
1979
 */
1980
void mbedtls_ssl_init(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
1981
1982
/**
1983
 * \brief          Set up an SSL context for use
1984
 *
1985
 * \note           No copy of the configuration context is made, it can be
1986
 *                 shared by many mbedtls_ssl_context structures.
1987
 *
1988
 * \warning        The conf structure will be accessed during the session.
1989
 *                 It must not be modified or freed as long as the session
1990
 *                 is active.
1991
 *
1992
 * \warning        This function must be called exactly once per context.
1993
 *                 Calling mbedtls_ssl_setup again is not supported, even
1994
 *                 if no session is active.
1995
 *
1996
 * \note           If #MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO is enabled, the PSA crypto
1997
 *                 subsystem must have been initialized by calling
1998
 *                 psa_crypto_init() before calling this function.
1999
 *
2000
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2001
 * \param conf     SSL configuration to use
2002
 *
2003
 * \return         0 if successful, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if
2004
 *                 memory allocation failed
2005
 */
2006
int mbedtls_ssl_setup(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2007
                      const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
2008
2009
/**
2010
 * \brief          Reset an already initialized SSL context for re-use
2011
 *                 while retaining application-set variables, function
2012
 *                 pointers and data.
2013
 *
2014
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2015
 * \return         0 if successful, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED or
2016
                   MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FAILED
2017
 */
2018
int mbedtls_ssl_session_reset(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
2019
2020
/**
2021
 * \brief          Set the current endpoint type
2022
 *
2023
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2024
 * \param endpoint must be MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
2025
 */
2026
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_endpoint(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int endpoint);
2027
2028
/**
2029
 * \brief          Get the current endpoint type
2030
 *
2031
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2032
 *
2033
 * \return         Endpoint type, either MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT
2034
 *                 or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
2035
 */
2036
static inline int mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_endpoint(const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2037
0
{
2038
0
    return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);
2039
0
}
2040
2041
/**
2042
 * \brief           Set the transport type (TLS or DTLS).
2043
 *                  Default: TLS
2044
 *
2045
 * \note            For DTLS, you must either provide a recv callback that
2046
 *                  doesn't block, or one that handles timeouts, see
2047
 *                  \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(). You also need to provide timer
2048
 *                  callbacks with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb().
2049
 *
2050
 * \param conf      SSL configuration
2051
 * \param transport transport type:
2052
 *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM for TLS,
2053
 *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM for DTLS.
2054
 */
2055
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_transport(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int transport);
2056
2057
/**
2058
 * \brief          Set the certificate verification mode
2059
 *                 Default: NONE on server, REQUIRED on client
2060
 *
2061
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2062
 * \param authmode can be:
2063
 *
2064
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE:      peer certificate is not checked
2065
 *                        (default on server)
2066
 *                        (insecure on client)
2067
 *
2068
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL:  peer certificate is checked, however the
2069
 *                        handshake continues even if verification failed;
2070
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result() can be called after the
2071
 *                        handshake is complete.
2072
 *
2073
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED:  peer *must* present a valid certificate,
2074
 *                        handshake is aborted if verification failed.
2075
 *                        (default on client)
2076
 *
2077
 * \note On client, MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED is the recommended mode.
2078
 * With MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL, the user needs to call mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result() at
2079
 * the right time(s), which may not be obvious, while REQUIRED always perform
2080
 * the verification as soon as possible. For example, REQUIRED was protecting
2081
 * against the "triple handshake" attack even before it was found.
2082
 */
2083
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_authmode(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int authmode);
2084
2085
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
2086
/**
2087
 * \brief    Set the early data mode
2088
 *           Default: disabled on server and client
2089
 *
2090
 * \param conf   The SSL configuration to use.
2091
 * \param early_data_enabled can be:
2092
 *
2093
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED:
2094
 *  Early data functionality is disabled. This is the default on client and
2095
 *  server.
2096
 *
2097
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED:
2098
 *  Early data functionality is enabled and may be negotiated in the handshake.
2099
 *  Application using early data functionality needs to be aware that the
2100
 *  security properties for early data (also refered to as 0-RTT data) are
2101
 *  weaker than those for other kinds of TLS data. See the documentation of
2102
 *  mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data() and mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data() for more
2103
 *  information.
2104
 *  When early data functionality is enabled on server and only in that case,
2105
 *  the call to one of the APIs that trigger or resume an handshake sequence,
2106
 *  namely mbedtls_ssl_handshake(), mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(),
2107
 *  mbedtls_ssl_read() or mbedtls_ssl_write() may return with the error code
2108
 *  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA indicating that some early data have
2109
 *  been received. To read the early data, call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
2110
 *  before calling the original function again.
2111
 */
2112
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2113
                                 int early_data_enabled);
2114
2115
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2116
/**
2117
 * \brief Set the maximum amount of 0-RTT data in bytes
2118
 *        Default:  #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE
2119
 *
2120
 *        This function sets the value of the max_early_data_size
2121
 *        field of the early data indication extension included in
2122
 *        the NewSessionTicket messages that the server may send.
2123
 *
2124
 *        The value defines the maximum amount of 0-RTT data
2125
 *        in bytes that a client will be allowed to send when using
2126
 *        one of the tickets defined by the NewSessionTicket messages.
2127
 *
2128
 * \note When resuming a session using a ticket, if the server receives more
2129
 *       early data than allowed for the ticket, it terminates the connection.
2130
 *       The maximum amount of 0-RTT data should thus be large enough
2131
 *       to allow a minimum of early data to be exchanged.
2132
 *
2133
 * \param[in] conf                  The SSL configuration to use.
2134
 * \param[in] max_early_data_size   The maximum amount of 0-RTT data.
2135
 *
2136
 * \warning This interface DOES NOT influence/limit the amount of early data
2137
 *          that can be received through previously created and issued tickets,
2138
 *          which clients may have stored.
2139
 */
2140
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_early_data_size(
2141
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t max_early_data_size);
2142
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2143
2144
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
2145
2146
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
2147
/**
2148
 * \brief          Set the verification callback (Optional).
2149
 *
2150
 *                 If set, the provided verify callback is called for each
2151
 *                 certificate in the peer's CRT chain, including the trusted
2152
 *                 root. For more information, please see the documentation of
2153
 *                 \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify().
2154
 *
2155
 * \note           For per context callbacks and contexts, please use
2156
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_verify() instead.
2157
 *
2158
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to use.
2159
 * \param f_vrfy   The verification callback to use during CRT verification.
2160
 * \param p_vrfy   The opaque context to be passed to the callback.
2161
 */
2162
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2163
                             int (*f_vrfy)(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *),
2164
                             void *p_vrfy);
2165
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
2166
2167
/**
2168
 * \brief          Set the random number generator callback
2169
 *
2170
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2171
 * \param f_rng    RNG function (mandatory)
2172
 * \param p_rng    RNG parameter
2173
 */
2174
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_rng(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2175
                          int (*f_rng)(void *, unsigned char *, size_t),
2176
                          void *p_rng);
2177
2178
/**
2179
 * \brief          Set the debug callback
2180
 *
2181
 *                 The callback has the following argument:
2182
 *                 void *           opaque context for the callback
2183
 *                 int              debug level
2184
 *                 const char *     file name
2185
 *                 int              line number
2186
 *                 const char *     message
2187
 *
2188
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2189
 * \param f_dbg    debug function
2190
 * \param p_dbg    debug parameter
2191
 */
2192
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dbg(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2193
                          void (*f_dbg)(void *, int, const char *, int, const char *),
2194
                          void  *p_dbg);
2195
2196
/**
2197
 * \brief          Return the SSL configuration structure associated
2198
 *                 with the given SSL context.
2199
 *
2200
 * \note           The pointer returned by this function is guaranteed to
2201
 *                 remain valid until the context is freed.
2202
 *
2203
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to query.
2204
 * \return         Pointer to the SSL configuration associated with \p ssl.
2205
 */
2206
static inline const mbedtls_ssl_config *mbedtls_ssl_context_get_config(
2207
    const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2208
0
{
2209
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(conf);
2210
0
}
2211
2212
/**
2213
 * \brief          Set the underlying BIO callbacks for write, read and
2214
 *                 read-with-timeout.
2215
 *
2216
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2217
 * \param p_bio    parameter (context) shared by BIO callbacks
2218
 * \param f_send   write callback
2219
 * \param f_recv   read callback
2220
 * \param f_recv_timeout blocking read callback with timeout.
2221
 *
2222
 * \note           One of f_recv or f_recv_timeout can be NULL, in which case
2223
 *                 the other is used. If both are non-NULL, f_recv_timeout is
2224
 *                 used and f_recv is ignored (as if it were NULL).
2225
 *
2226
 * \note           The two most common use cases are:
2227
 *                 - non-blocking I/O, f_recv != NULL, f_recv_timeout == NULL
2228
 *                 - blocking I/O, f_recv == NULL, f_recv_timeout != NULL
2229
 *
2230
 * \note           For DTLS, you need to provide either a non-NULL
2231
 *                 f_recv_timeout callback, or a f_recv that doesn't block.
2232
 *
2233
 * \note           See the documentations of \c mbedtls_ssl_send_t,
2234
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_recv_t and \c mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t for
2235
 *                 the conventions those callbacks must follow.
2236
 *
2237
 * \note           On some platforms, net_sockets.c provides
2238
 *                 \c mbedtls_net_send(), \c mbedtls_net_recv() and
2239
 *                 \c mbedtls_net_recv_timeout() that are suitable to be used
2240
 *                 here.
2241
 */
2242
void mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2243
                         void *p_bio,
2244
                         mbedtls_ssl_send_t *f_send,
2245
                         mbedtls_ssl_recv_t *f_recv,
2246
                         mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t *f_recv_timeout);
2247
2248
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
2249
2250
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
2251
2252
2253
/**
2254
 * \brief             Configure the use of the Connection ID (CID)
2255
 *                    extension in the next handshake.
2256
 *
2257
 *                    Reference: RFC 9146 (or draft-ietf-tls-dtls-connection-id-05
2258
 *                    https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-tls-dtls-connection-id-05
2259
 *                    for legacy version)
2260
 *
2261
 *                    The DTLS CID extension allows the reliable association of
2262
 *                    DTLS records to DTLS connections across changes in the
2263
 *                    underlying transport (changed IP and Port metadata) by
2264
 *                    adding explicit connection identifiers (CIDs) to the
2265
 *                    headers of encrypted DTLS records. The desired CIDs are
2266
 *                    configured by the application layer and are exchanged in
2267
 *                    new `ClientHello` / `ServerHello` extensions during the
2268
 *                    handshake, where each side indicates the CID it wants the
2269
 *                    peer to use when writing encrypted messages. The CIDs are
2270
 *                    put to use once records get encrypted: the stack discards
2271
 *                    any incoming records that don't include the configured CID
2272
 *                    in their header, and adds the peer's requested CID to the
2273
 *                    headers of outgoing messages.
2274
 *
2275
 *                    This API enables or disables the use of the CID extension
2276
 *                    in the next handshake and sets the value of the CID to
2277
 *                    be used for incoming messages.
2278
 *
2279
 * \param ssl         The SSL context to configure. This must be initialized.
2280
 * \param enable      This value determines whether the CID extension should
2281
 *                    be used or not. Possible values are:
2282
 *                    - MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED to enable the use of the CID.
2283
 *                    - MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED (default) to disable the use
2284
 *                      of the CID.
2285
 * \param own_cid     The address of the readable buffer holding the CID we want
2286
 *                    the peer to use when sending encrypted messages to us.
2287
 *                    This may be \c NULL if \p own_cid_len is \c 0.
2288
 *                    This parameter is unused if \p enable is set to
2289
 *                    MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2290
 * \param own_cid_len The length of \p own_cid.
2291
 *                    This parameter is unused if \p enable is set to
2292
 *                    MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2293
 *
2294
 * \note              The value of \p own_cid_len must match the value of the
2295
 *                    \c len parameter passed to mbedtls_ssl_conf_cid()
2296
 *                    when configuring the ::mbedtls_ssl_config that \p ssl
2297
 *                    is bound to.
2298
 *
2299
 * \note              This CID configuration applies to subsequent handshakes
2300
 *                    performed on the SSL context \p ssl, but does not trigger
2301
 *                    one. You still have to call `mbedtls_ssl_handshake()`
2302
 *                    (for the initial handshake) or `mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate()`
2303
 *                    (for a renegotiation handshake) explicitly after a
2304
 *                    successful call to this function to run the handshake.
2305
 *
2306
 * \note              This call cannot guarantee that the use of the CID
2307
 *                    will be successfully negotiated in the next handshake,
2308
 *                    because the peer might not support it. Specifically:
2309
 *                    - On the Client, enabling the use of the CID through
2310
 *                      this call implies that the `ClientHello` in the next
2311
 *                      handshake will include the CID extension, thereby
2312
 *                      offering the use of the CID to the server. Only if
2313
 *                      the `ServerHello` contains the CID extension, too,
2314
 *                      the CID extension will actually be put to use.
2315
 *                    - On the Server, enabling the use of the CID through
2316
 *                      this call implies that the server will look for
2317
 *                      the CID extension in a `ClientHello` from the client,
2318
 *                      and, if present, reply with a CID extension in its
2319
 *                      `ServerHello`.
2320
 *
2321
 * \note              To check whether the use of the CID was negotiated
2322
 *                    after the subsequent handshake has completed, please
2323
 *                    use the API mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cid().
2324
 *
2325
 * \warning           If the use of the CID extension is enabled in this call
2326
 *                    and the subsequent handshake negotiates its use, Mbed TLS
2327
 *                    will silently drop every packet whose CID does not match
2328
 *                    the CID configured in \p own_cid. It is the responsibility
2329
 *                    of the user to adapt the underlying transport to take care
2330
 *                    of CID-based demultiplexing before handing datagrams to
2331
 *                    Mbed TLS.
2332
 *
2333
 * \return            \c 0 on success. In this case, the CID configuration
2334
 *                    applies to the next handshake.
2335
 * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2336
 */
2337
int mbedtls_ssl_set_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2338
                        int enable,
2339
                        unsigned char const *own_cid,
2340
                        size_t own_cid_len);
2341
2342
/**
2343
 * \brief              Get information about our request for usage of the CID
2344
 *                     extension in the current connection.
2345
 *
2346
 * \param ssl          The SSL context to query.
2347
 * \param enabled      The address at which to store whether the CID extension
2348
 *                     is requested to be used or not. If the CID is
2349
 *                     requested, `*enabled` is set to
2350
 *                     MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED; otherwise, it is set to
2351
 *                     MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2352
 * \param own_cid      The address of the buffer in which to store our own
2353
 *                     CID (if the CID extension is requested). This may be
2354
 *                     \c NULL in case the value of our CID isn't needed. If
2355
 *                     it is not \c NULL, \p own_cid_len must not be \c NULL.
2356
 * \param own_cid_len  The address at which to store the size of our own CID
2357
 *                     (if the CID extension is requested). This is also the
2358
 *                     number of Bytes in \p own_cid that have been written.
2359
 *                     This may be \c NULL in case the length of our own CID
2360
 *                     isn't needed. If it is \c NULL, \p own_cid must be
2361
 *                     \c NULL, too.
2362
 *
2363
 *\note                If we are requesting an empty CID this function sets
2364
 *                     `*enabled` to #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED (the rationale
2365
 *                     for this is that the resulting outcome is the
2366
 *                     same as if the CID extensions wasn't requested).
2367
 *
2368
 * \return            \c 0 on success.
2369
 * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2370
 */
2371
int mbedtls_ssl_get_own_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2372
                            int *enabled,
2373
                            unsigned char own_cid[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX],
2374
                            size_t *own_cid_len);
2375
2376
/**
2377
 * \brief              Get information about the use of the CID extension
2378
 *                     in the current connection.
2379
 *
2380
 * \param ssl          The SSL context to query.
2381
 * \param enabled      The address at which to store whether the CID extension
2382
 *                     is currently in use or not. If the CID is in use,
2383
 *                     `*enabled` is set to MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED;
2384
 *                     otherwise, it is set to MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2385
 * \param peer_cid     The address of the buffer in which to store the CID
2386
 *                     chosen by the peer (if the CID extension is used).
2387
 *                     This may be \c NULL in case the value of peer CID
2388
 *                     isn't needed. If it is not \c NULL, \p peer_cid_len
2389
 *                     must not be \c NULL.
2390
 * \param peer_cid_len The address at which to store the size of the CID
2391
 *                     chosen by the peer (if the CID extension is used).
2392
 *                     This is also the number of Bytes in \p peer_cid that
2393
 *                     have been written.
2394
 *                     This may be \c NULL in case the length of the peer CID
2395
 *                     isn't needed. If it is \c NULL, \p peer_cid must be
2396
 *                     \c NULL, too.
2397
 *
2398
 * \note               This applies to the state of the CID negotiated in
2399
 *                     the last complete handshake. If a handshake is in
2400
 *                     progress, this function will attempt to complete
2401
 *                     the handshake first.
2402
 *
2403
 * \note               If CID extensions have been exchanged but both client
2404
 *                     and server chose to use an empty CID, this function
2405
 *                     sets `*enabled` to #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED
2406
 *                     (the rationale for this is that the resulting
2407
 *                     communication is the same as if the CID extensions
2408
 *                     hadn't been used).
2409
 *
2410
 * \return            \c 0 on success.
2411
 * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2412
 */
2413
int mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2414
                             int *enabled,
2415
                             unsigned char peer_cid[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX],
2416
                             size_t *peer_cid_len);
2417
2418
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
2419
2420
/**
2421
 * \brief          Set the Maximum Transport Unit (MTU).
2422
 *                 Special value: 0 means unset (no limit).
2423
 *                 This represents the maximum size of a datagram payload
2424
 *                 handled by the transport layer (usually UDP) as determined
2425
 *                 by the network link and stack. In practice, this controls
2426
 *                 the maximum size datagram the DTLS layer will pass to the
2427
 *                 \c f_send() callback set using \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio().
2428
 *
2429
 * \note           The limit on datagram size is converted to a limit on
2430
 *                 record payload by subtracting the current overhead of
2431
 *                 encapsulation and encryption/authentication if any.
2432
 *
2433
 * \note           This can be called at any point during the connection, for
2434
 *                 example when a Path Maximum Transfer Unit (PMTU)
2435
 *                 estimate becomes available from other sources,
2436
 *                 such as lower (or higher) protocol layers.
2437
 *
2438
 * \note           This setting only controls the size of the packets we send,
2439
 *                 and does not restrict the size of the datagrams we're
2440
 *                 willing to receive. Client-side, you can request the
2441
 *                 server to use smaller records with \c
2442
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_frag_len().
2443
 *
2444
 * \note           If both a MTU and a maximum fragment length have been
2445
 *                 configured (or negotiated with the peer), the resulting
2446
 *                 lower limit on record payload (see first note) is used.
2447
 *
2448
 * \note           This can only be used to decrease the maximum size
2449
 *                 of datagrams (hence records, see first note) sent. It
2450
 *                 cannot be used to increase the maximum size of records over
2451
 *                 the limit set by #MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN.
2452
 *
2453
 * \note           Values lower than the current record layer expansion will
2454
 *                 result in an error when trying to send data.
2455
 *
2456
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2457
 * \param mtu      Value of the path MTU in bytes
2458
 */
2459
void mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, uint16_t mtu);
2460
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
2461
2462
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
2463
/**
2464
 * \brief          Set a connection-specific verification callback (optional).
2465
 *
2466
 *                 If set, the provided verify callback is called for each
2467
 *                 certificate in the peer's CRT chain, including the trusted
2468
 *                 root. For more information, please see the documentation of
2469
 *                 \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify().
2470
 *
2471
 * \note           This call is analogous to mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() but
2472
 *                 binds the verification callback and context to an SSL context
2473
 *                 as opposed to an SSL configuration.
2474
 *                 If mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() and mbedtls_ssl_set_verify()
2475
 *                 are both used, mbedtls_ssl_set_verify() takes precedence.
2476
 *
2477
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
2478
 * \param f_vrfy   The verification callback to use during CRT verification.
2479
 * \param p_vrfy   The opaque context to be passed to the callback.
2480
 */
2481
void mbedtls_ssl_set_verify(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2482
                            int (*f_vrfy)(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *),
2483
                            void *p_vrfy);
2484
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
2485
2486
/**
2487
 * \brief          Set the timeout period for mbedtls_ssl_read()
2488
 *                 (Default: no timeout.)
2489
 *
2490
 * \param conf     SSL configuration context
2491
 * \param timeout  Timeout value in milliseconds.
2492
 *                 Use 0 for no timeout (default).
2493
 *
2494
 * \note           With blocking I/O, this will only work if a non-NULL
2495
 *                 \c f_recv_timeout was set with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio().
2496
 *                 With non-blocking I/O, this will only work if timer
2497
 *                 callbacks were set with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb().
2498
 *
2499
 * \note           With non-blocking I/O, you may also skip this function
2500
 *                 altogether and handle timeouts at the application layer.
2501
 */
2502
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_read_timeout(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t timeout);
2503
2504
/**
2505
 * \brief          Check whether a buffer contains a valid and authentic record
2506
 *                 that has not been seen before. (DTLS only).
2507
 *
2508
 *                 This function does not change the user-visible state
2509
 *                 of the SSL context. Its sole purpose is to provide
2510
 *                 an indication of the legitimacy of an incoming record.
2511
 *
2512
 *                 This can be useful e.g. in distributed server environments
2513
 *                 using the DTLS Connection ID feature, in which connections
2514
 *                 might need to be passed between service instances on a change
2515
 *                 of peer address, but where such disruptive operations should
2516
 *                 only happen after the validity of incoming records has been
2517
 *                 confirmed.
2518
 *
2519
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
2520
 * \param buf      The address of the buffer holding the record to be checked.
2521
 *                 This must be a read/write buffer of length \p buflen Bytes.
2522
 * \param buflen   The length of \p buf in Bytes.
2523
 *
2524
 * \note           This routine only checks whether the provided buffer begins
2525
 *                 with a valid and authentic record that has not been seen
2526
 *                 before, but does not check potential data following the
2527
 *                 initial record. In particular, it is possible to pass DTLS
2528
 *                 datagrams containing multiple records, in which case only
2529
 *                 the first record is checked.
2530
 *
2531
 * \note           This function modifies the input buffer \p buf. If you need
2532
 *                 to preserve the original record, you have to maintain a copy.
2533
 *
2534
 * \return         \c 0 if the record is valid and authentic and has not been
2535
 *                 seen before.
2536
 * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC if the check completed
2537
 *                 successfully but the record was found to be not authentic.
2538
 * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_RECORD if the check completed
2539
 *                 successfully but the record was found to be invalid for
2540
 *                 a reason different from authenticity checking.
2541
 * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_RECORD if the check completed
2542
 *                 successfully but the record was found to be unexpected
2543
 *                 in the state of the SSL context, including replayed records.
2544
 * \return         Another negative error code on different kinds of failure.
2545
 *                 In this case, the SSL context becomes unusable and needs
2546
 *                 to be freed or reset before reuse.
2547
 */
2548
int mbedtls_ssl_check_record(mbedtls_ssl_context const *ssl,
2549
                             unsigned char *buf,
2550
                             size_t buflen);
2551
2552
/**
2553
 * \brief          Set the timer callbacks (Mandatory for DTLS.)
2554
 *
2555
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2556
 * \param p_timer  parameter (context) shared by timer callbacks
2557
 * \param f_set_timer   set timer callback
2558
 * \param f_get_timer   get timer callback. Must return:
2559
 *
2560
 * \note           See the documentation of \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t and
2561
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t for the conventions this pair of
2562
 *                 callbacks must follow.
2563
 *
2564
 * \note           On some platforms, timing.c provides
2565
 *                 \c mbedtls_timing_set_delay() and
2566
 *                 \c mbedtls_timing_get_delay() that are suitable for using
2567
 *                 here, except if using an event-driven style.
2568
 *
2569
 * \note           See also the "DTLS tutorial" article in our knowledge base.
2570
 *                 https://mbed-tls.readthedocs.io/en/latest/kb/how-to/dtls-tutorial
2571
 */
2572
void mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2573
                              void *p_timer,
2574
                              mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t *f_set_timer,
2575
                              mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t *f_get_timer);
2576
2577
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2578
/**
2579
 * \brief           Set the certificate selection callback (server-side only).
2580
 *
2581
 *                  If set, the callback is always called for each handshake,
2582
 *                  after `ClientHello` processing has finished.
2583
 *
2584
 * \param conf      The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
2585
 * \param f_cert_cb The callback for selecting server certificate after
2586
 *                  `ClientHello` processing has finished.
2587
 */
2588
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2589
                                            mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t f_cert_cb)
2590
0
{
2591
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cert_cb) = f_cert_cb;
2592
0
}
2593
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2594
2595
/**
2596
 * \brief           Callback type: generate and write session ticket
2597
 *
2598
 * \note            This describes what a callback implementation should do.
2599
 *                  This callback should generate an encrypted and
2600
 *                  authenticated ticket for the session and write it to the
2601
 *                  output buffer. Here, ticket means the opaque ticket part
2602
 *                  of the NewSessionTicket structure of RFC 5077.
2603
 *
2604
 * \param p_ticket  Context for the callback
2605
 * \param session   SSL session to be written in the ticket
2606
 * \param start     Start of the output buffer
2607
 * \param end       End of the output buffer
2608
 * \param tlen      On exit, holds the length written
2609
 * \param lifetime  On exit, holds the lifetime of the ticket in seconds
2610
 *
2611
 * \return          0 if successful, or
2612
 *                  a specific MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX code.
2613
 */
2614
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t(void *p_ticket,
2615
                                       const mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
2616
                                       unsigned char *start,
2617
                                       const unsigned char *end,
2618
                                       size_t *tlen,
2619
                                       uint32_t *lifetime);
2620
2621
/**
2622
 * \brief           Callback type: parse and load session ticket
2623
 *
2624
 * \note            This describes what a callback implementation should do.
2625
 *                  This callback should parse a session ticket as generated
2626
 *                  by the corresponding mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t function,
2627
 *                  and, if the ticket is authentic and valid, load the
2628
 *                  session.
2629
 *
2630
 * \note            The implementation is allowed to modify the first len
2631
 *                  bytes of the input buffer, eg to use it as a temporary
2632
 *                  area for the decrypted ticket contents.
2633
 *
2634
 * \param p_ticket  Context for the callback
2635
 * \param session   SSL session to be loaded
2636
 * \param buf       Start of the buffer containing the ticket
2637
 * \param len       Length of the ticket.
2638
 *
2639
 * \return          0 if successful, or
2640
 *                  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC if not authentic, or
2641
 *                  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_SESSION_TICKET_EXPIRED if expired, or
2642
 *                  any other non-zero code for other failures.
2643
 */
2644
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_ticket_parse_t(void *p_ticket,
2645
                                       mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
2646
                                       unsigned char *buf,
2647
                                       size_t len);
2648
2649
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2650
/**
2651
 * \brief           Configure SSL session ticket callbacks (server only).
2652
 *                  (Default: none.)
2653
 *
2654
 * \note            On server, session tickets are enabled by providing
2655
 *                  non-NULL callbacks.
2656
 *
2657
 * \note            On client, use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets().
2658
 *
2659
 * \param conf      SSL configuration context
2660
 * \param f_ticket_write    Callback for writing a ticket
2661
 * \param f_ticket_parse    Callback for parsing a ticket
2662
 * \param p_ticket          Context shared by the two callbacks
2663
 */
2664
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2665
                                         mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t *f_ticket_write,
2666
                                         mbedtls_ssl_ticket_parse_t *f_ticket_parse,
2667
                                         void *p_ticket);
2668
2669
#if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
2670
/**
2671
 * \brief Get the creation time of a session ticket.
2672
 *
2673
 * \note See the documentation of \c ticket_creation_time for information about
2674
 *       the intended usage of this function.
2675
 *
2676
 * \param session  SSL session
2677
 * \param ticket_creation_time  On exit, holds the ticket creation time in
2678
 *                              milliseconds.
2679
 *
2680
 * \return         0 on success,
2681
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if an input is not valid.
2682
 */
2683
static inline int mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ticket_creation_time(
2684
    mbedtls_ssl_session *session, mbedtls_ms_time_t *ticket_creation_time)
2685
0
{
2686
0
    if (session == NULL || ticket_creation_time == NULL ||
2687
0
        session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint) != MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER) {
2688
0
        return MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA;
2689
0
    }
2690
0
2691
0
    *ticket_creation_time = session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_creation_time);
2692
0
2693
0
    return 0;
2694
0
}
2695
#endif /* MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME */
2696
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2697
2698
/**
2699
 * \brief          Get the session-id buffer.
2700
 *
2701
 * \param session  SSL session.
2702
 *
2703
 * \return         The address of the session-id buffer.
2704
 */
2705
static inline unsigned const char (*mbedtls_ssl_session_get_id(const mbedtls_ssl_session *
2706
                                                               session))[32]
2707
0
{
2708
0
    return &session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id);
2709
0
}
2710
2711
/**
2712
 * \brief          Get the size of the session-id.
2713
 *
2714
 * \param session  SSL session.
2715
 *
2716
 * \return         size_t size of session-id buffer.
2717
 */
2718
static inline size_t mbedtls_ssl_session_get_id_len(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
2719
0
{
2720
0
    return session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id_len);
2721
0
}
2722
2723
/**
2724
 * \brief          Get the ciphersuite-id.
2725
 *
2726
 * \param session  SSL session.
2727
 *
2728
 * \return         int represetation for ciphersuite.
2729
 */
2730
static inline int mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ciphersuite_id(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
2731
0
{
2732
0
    return session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite);
2733
0
}
2734
2735
/**
2736
 * \brief   Configure a key export callback.
2737
 *          (Default: none.)
2738
 *
2739
 *          This API can be used for two purposes:
2740
 *          - Debugging: Use this API to e.g. generate an NSSKeylog
2741
 *            file and use it to inspect encrypted traffic in tools
2742
 *            such as Wireshark.
2743
 *          - Application-specific export: Use this API to implement
2744
 *            key exporters, e.g. for EAP-TLS or DTLS-SRTP.
2745
 *
2746
 *
2747
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to which the export
2748
 *                       callback should be attached.
2749
 * \param f_export_keys  The callback for the key export.
2750
 * \param p_export_keys  The opaque context pointer to be passed to the
2751
 *                       callback \p f_export_keys.
2752
 */
2753
void mbedtls_ssl_set_export_keys_cb(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2754
                                    mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t *f_export_keys,
2755
                                    void *p_export_keys);
2756
2757
/** \brief Set the user data in an SSL configuration to a pointer.
2758
 *
2759
 * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p().
2760
 *
2761
 * \note The library stores \c p without accessing it. It is the responsibility
2762
 *       of the caller to ensure that the pointer remains valid.
2763
 *
2764
 * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2765
 * \param p              The new value of the user data.
2766
 */
2767
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p(
2768
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2769
    void *p)
2770
0
{
2771
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p = p;
2772
0
}
2773
2774
/** \brief Set the user data in an SSL configuration to an integer.
2775
 *
2776
 * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n().
2777
 *
2778
 * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2779
 * \param n              The new value of the user data.
2780
 */
2781
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n(
2782
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2783
    uintptr_t n)
2784
0
{
2785
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n = n;
2786
0
}
2787
2788
/** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL configuration as a pointer.
2789
 *
2790
 * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p(), or
2791
 * \c NULL if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p() has not previously been
2792
 * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n() has
2793
 * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p().
2794
 *
2795
 * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2796
 * \return               The current value of the user data.
2797
 */
2798
static inline void *mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p(
2799
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2800
0
{
2801
0
    return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p;
2802
0
}
2803
2804
/** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL configuration as an integer.
2805
 *
2806
 * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n(), or
2807
 * \c 0 if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n() has not previously been
2808
 * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p() has
2809
 * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n().
2810
 *
2811
 * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2812
 * \return               The current value of the user data.
2813
 */
2814
static inline uintptr_t mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n(
2815
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2816
0
{
2817
0
    return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n;
2818
0
}
2819
2820
/** \brief Set the user data in an SSL context to a pointer.
2821
 *
2822
 * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p().
2823
 *
2824
 * \note The library stores \c p without accessing it. It is the responsibility
2825
 *       of the caller to ensure that the pointer remains valid.
2826
 *
2827
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2828
 * \param p              The new value of the user data.
2829
 */
2830
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p(
2831
    mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2832
    void *p)
2833
0
{
2834
0
    ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p = p;
2835
0
}
2836
2837
/** \brief Set the user data in an SSL context to an integer.
2838
 *
2839
 * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n().
2840
 *
2841
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2842
 * \param n              The new value of the user data.
2843
 */
2844
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n(
2845
    mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2846
    uintptr_t n)
2847
0
{
2848
0
    ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n = n;
2849
0
}
2850
2851
/** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL context as a pointer.
2852
 *
2853
 * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p(), or
2854
 * \c NULL if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() has not previously been
2855
 * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() has
2856
 * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p().
2857
 *
2858
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2859
 * \return               The current value of the user data.
2860
 */
2861
static inline void *mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p(
2862
    mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2863
0
{
2864
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p;
2865
0
}
2866
2867
/** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL context as an integer.
2868
 *
2869
 * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n(), or
2870
 * \c 0 if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() has not previously been
2871
 * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() has
2872
 * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n().
2873
 *
2874
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2875
 * \return               The current value of the user data.
2876
 */
2877
static inline uintptr_t mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n(
2878
    mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2879
0
{
2880
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n;
2881
0
}
2882
2883
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
2884
/**
2885
 * \brief           Configure asynchronous private key operation callbacks.
2886
 *
2887
 * \param conf              SSL configuration context
2888
 * \param f_async_sign      Callback to start a signature operation. See
2889
 *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t
2890
 *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if the
2891
 *                          external processor does not support any signature
2892
 *                          operation; in this case the private key object
2893
 *                          associated with the certificate will be used.
2894
 * \param f_async_decrypt   Callback to start a decryption operation. See
2895
 *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t
2896
 *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if the
2897
 *                          external processor does not support any decryption
2898
 *                          operation; in this case the private key object
2899
 *                          associated with the certificate will be used.
2900
 * \param f_async_resume    Callback to resume an asynchronous operation. See
2901
 *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t
2902
 *                          for more information. This may not be \c NULL unless
2903
 *                          \p f_async_sign and \p f_async_decrypt are both
2904
 *                          \c NULL.
2905
 * \param f_async_cancel    Callback to cancel an asynchronous operation. See
2906
 *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t
2907
 *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if
2908
 *                          no cleanup is needed.
2909
 * \param config_data       A pointer to configuration data which can be
2910
 *                          retrieved with
2911
 *                          mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_async_config_data(). The
2912
 *                          library stores this value without dereferencing it.
2913
 */
2914
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2915
                                       mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t *f_async_sign,
2916
                                       mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t *f_async_decrypt,
2917
                                       mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t *f_async_resume,
2918
                                       mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t *f_async_cancel,
2919
                                       void *config_data);
2920
2921
/**
2922
 * \brief           Retrieve the configuration data set by
2923
 *                  mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb().
2924
 *
2925
 * \param conf      SSL configuration context
2926
 * \return          The configuration data set by
2927
 *                  mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb().
2928
 */
2929
void *mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_async_config_data(const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
2930
2931
/**
2932
 * \brief           Retrieve the asynchronous operation user context.
2933
 *
2934
 * \note            This function may only be called while a handshake
2935
 *                  is in progress.
2936
 *
2937
 * \param ssl       The SSL context to access.
2938
 *
2939
 * \return          The asynchronous operation user context that was last
2940
 *                  set during the current handshake. If
2941
 *                  mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data() has not yet been
2942
 *                  called during the current handshake, this function returns
2943
 *                  \c NULL.
2944
 */
2945
void *mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
2946
2947
/**
2948
 * \brief           Retrieve the asynchronous operation user context.
2949
 *
2950
 * \note            This function may only be called while a handshake
2951
 *                  is in progress.
2952
 *
2953
 * \param ssl       The SSL context to access.
2954
 * \param ctx       The new value of the asynchronous operation user context.
2955
 *                  Call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data() later during the
2956
 *                  same handshake to retrieve this value.
2957
 */
2958
void mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2959
                                          void *ctx);
2960
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
2961
2962
/**
2963
 * \brief          Callback type: generate a cookie
2964
 *
2965
 * \param ctx      Context for the callback
2966
 * \param p        Buffer to write to,
2967
 *                 must be updated to point right after the cookie
2968
 * \param end      Pointer to one past the end of the output buffer
2969
 * \param info     Client ID info that was passed to
2970
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id()
2971
 * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
2972
 *
2973
 * \return         The callback must return 0 on success,
2974
 *                 or a negative error code.
2975
 */
2976
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cookie_write_t(void *ctx,
2977
                                       unsigned char **p, unsigned char *end,
2978
                                       const unsigned char *info, size_t ilen);
2979
2980
/**
2981
 * \brief          Callback type: verify a cookie
2982
 *
2983
 * \param ctx      Context for the callback
2984
 * \param cookie   Cookie to verify
2985
 * \param clen     Length of cookie
2986
 * \param info     Client ID info that was passed to
2987
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id()
2988
 * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
2989
 *
2990
 * \return         The callback must return 0 if cookie is valid,
2991
 *                 or a negative error code.
2992
 */
2993
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cookie_check_t(void *ctx,
2994
                                       const unsigned char *cookie, size_t clen,
2995
                                       const unsigned char *info, size_t ilen);
2996
2997
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2998
/**
2999
 * \brief           Register callbacks for DTLS cookies
3000
 *                  (Server only. DTLS only.)
3001
 *
3002
 *                  Default: dummy callbacks that fail, in order to force you to
3003
 *                  register working callbacks (and initialize their context).
3004
 *
3005
 *                  To disable HelloVerifyRequest, register NULL callbacks.
3006
 *
3007
 * \warning         Disabling hello verification allows your server to be used
3008
 *                  for amplification in DoS attacks against other hosts.
3009
 *                  Only disable if you known this can't happen in your
3010
 *                  particular environment.
3011
 *
3012
 * \note            See comments on \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() about handling
3013
 *                  the MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED that is expected
3014
 *                  on the first handshake attempt when this is enabled.
3015
 *
3016
 * \note            This is also necessary to handle client reconnection from
3017
 *                  the same port as described in RFC 6347 section 4.2.8 (only
3018
 *                  the variant with cookies is supported currently). See
3019
 *                  comments on \c mbedtls_ssl_read() for details.
3020
 *
3021
 * \param conf              SSL configuration
3022
 * \param f_cookie_write    Cookie write callback
3023
 * \param f_cookie_check    Cookie check callback
3024
 * \param p_cookie          Context for both callbacks
3025
 */
3026
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_cookies(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3027
                                   mbedtls_ssl_cookie_write_t *f_cookie_write,
3028
                                   mbedtls_ssl_cookie_check_t *f_cookie_check,
3029
                                   void *p_cookie);
3030
3031
/**
3032
 * \brief          Set client's transport-level identification info.
3033
 *                 (Server only. DTLS only.)
3034
 *
3035
 *                 This is usually the IP address (and port), but could be
3036
 *                 anything identify the client depending on the underlying
3037
 *                 network stack. Used for HelloVerifyRequest with DTLS.
3038
 *                 This is *not* used to route the actual packets.
3039
 *
3040
 * \param ssl      SSL context
3041
 * \param info     Transport-level info identifying the client (eg IP + port)
3042
 * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
3043
 *
3044
 * \note           An internal copy is made, so the info buffer can be reused.
3045
 *
3046
 * \return         0 on success,
3047
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if used on client,
3048
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if out of memory.
3049
 */
3050
int mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3051
                                        const unsigned char *info,
3052
                                        size_t ilen);
3053
3054
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3055
3056
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
3057
/**
3058
 * \brief          Enable or disable anti-replay protection for DTLS.
3059
 *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3060
 *                 Default: enabled.
3061
 *
3062
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3063
 * \param mode     MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_DISABLED.
3064
 *
3065
 * \warning        Disabling this is a security risk unless the application
3066
 *                 protocol handles duplicated packets in a safe way. You
3067
 *                 should not disable this without careful consideration.
3068
 *                 However, if your application already detects duplicated
3069
 *                 packets and needs information about them to adjust its
3070
 *                 transmission strategy, then you'll want to disable this.
3071
 */
3072
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_anti_replay(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char mode);
3073
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY */
3074
3075
/**
3076
 * \brief          Set a limit on the number of records with a bad MAC
3077
 *                 before terminating the connection.
3078
 *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3079
 *                 Default: 0 (disabled).
3080
 *
3081
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3082
 * \param limit    Limit, or 0 to disable.
3083
 *
3084
 * \note           If the limit is N, then the connection is terminated when
3085
 *                 the Nth non-authentic record is seen.
3086
 *
3087
 * \note           Records with an invalid header are not counted, only the
3088
 *                 ones going through the authentication-decryption phase.
3089
 *
3090
 * \note           This is a security trade-off related to the fact that it's
3091
 *                 often relatively easy for an active attacker to inject UDP
3092
 *                 datagrams. On one hand, setting a low limit here makes it
3093
 *                 easier for such an attacker to forcibly terminated a
3094
 *                 connection. On the other hand, a high limit or no limit
3095
 *                 might make us waste resources checking authentication on
3096
 *                 many bogus packets.
3097
 */
3098
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_badmac_limit(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, unsigned limit);
3099
3100
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
3101
3102
/**
3103
 * \brief          Allow or disallow packing of multiple handshake records
3104
 *                 within a single datagram.
3105
 *
3106
 * \param ssl           The SSL context to configure.
3107
 * \param allow_packing This determines whether datagram packing may
3108
 *                      be used or not. A value of \c 0 means that every
3109
 *                      record will be sent in a separate datagram; a
3110
 *                      value of \c 1 means that, if space permits,
3111
 *                      multiple handshake messages (including CCS) belonging to
3112
 *                      a single flight may be packed within a single datagram.
3113
 *
3114
 * \note           This is enabled by default and should only be disabled
3115
 *                 for test purposes, or if datagram packing causes
3116
 *                 interoperability issues with peers that don't support it.
3117
 *
3118
 * \note           Allowing datagram packing reduces the network load since
3119
 *                 there's less overhead if multiple messages share the same
3120
 *                 datagram. Also, it increases the handshake efficiency
3121
 *                 since messages belonging to a single datagram will not
3122
 *                 be reordered in transit, and so future message buffering
3123
 *                 or flight retransmission (if no buffering is used) as
3124
 *                 means to deal with reordering are needed less frequently.
3125
 *
3126
 * \note           Application records are not affected by this option and
3127
 *                 are currently always sent in separate datagrams.
3128
 *
3129
 */
3130
void mbedtls_ssl_set_datagram_packing(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3131
                                      unsigned allow_packing);
3132
3133
/**
3134
 * \brief          Set retransmit timeout values for the DTLS handshake.
3135
 *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3136
 *
3137
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3138
 * \param min      Initial timeout value in milliseconds.
3139
 *                 Default: 1000 (1 second).
3140
 * \param max      Maximum timeout value in milliseconds.
3141
 *                 Default: 60000 (60 seconds).
3142
 *
3143
 * \note           Default values are from RFC 6347 section 4.2.4.1.
3144
 *
3145
 * \note           The 'min' value should typically be slightly above the
3146
 *                 expected round-trip time to your peer, plus whatever time
3147
 *                 it takes for the peer to process the message. For example,
3148
 *                 if your RTT is about 600ms and you peer needs up to 1s to
3149
 *                 do the cryptographic operations in the handshake, then you
3150
 *                 should set 'min' slightly above 1600. Lower values of 'min'
3151
 *                 might cause spurious resends which waste network resources,
3152
 *                 while larger value of 'min' will increase overall latency
3153
 *                 on unreliable network links.
3154
 *
3155
 * \note           The more unreliable your network connection is, the larger
3156
 *                 your max / min ratio needs to be in order to achieve
3157
 *                 reliable handshakes.
3158
 *
3159
 * \note           Messages are retransmitted up to log2(ceil(max/min)) times.
3160
 *                 For example, if min = 1s and max = 5s, the retransmit plan
3161
 *                 goes: send ... 1s -> resend ... 2s -> resend ... 4s ->
3162
 *                 resend ... 5s -> give up and return a timeout error.
3163
 */
3164
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_handshake_timeout(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t min, uint32_t max);
3165
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
3166
3167
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3168
/**
3169
 * \brief          Set the session cache callbacks (server-side only)
3170
 *                 If not set, no session resuming is done (except if session
3171
 *                 tickets are enabled too).
3172
 *
3173
 *                 The session cache has the responsibility to check for stale
3174
 *                 entries based on timeout. See RFC 5246 for recommendations.
3175
 *
3176
 *                 Warning: session.peer_cert is cleared by the SSL/TLS layer on
3177
 *                 connection shutdown, so do not cache the pointer! Either set
3178
 *                 it to NULL or make a full copy of the certificate.
3179
 *
3180
 *                 The get callback is called once during the initial handshake
3181
 *                 to enable session resuming. The get function has the
3182
 *                 following parameters: (void *parameter, mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
3183
 *                 If a valid entry is found, it should fill the master of
3184
 *                 the session object with the cached values and return 0,
3185
 *                 return 1 otherwise. Optionally peer_cert can be set as well
3186
 *                 if it is properly present in cache entry.
3187
 *
3188
 *                 The set callback is called once during the initial handshake
3189
 *                 to enable session resuming after the entire handshake has
3190
 *                 been finished. The set function has the following parameters:
3191
 *                 (void *parameter, const mbedtls_ssl_session *session). The function
3192
 *                 should create a cache entry for future retrieval based on
3193
 *                 the data in the session structure and should keep in mind
3194
 *                 that the mbedtls_ssl_session object presented (and all its referenced
3195
 *                 data) is cleared by the SSL/TLS layer when the connection is
3196
 *                 terminated. It is recommended to add metadata to determine if
3197
 *                 an entry is still valid in the future. Return 0 if
3198
 *                 successfully cached, return 1 otherwise.
3199
 *
3200
 * \param conf           SSL configuration
3201
 * \param p_cache        parameter (context) for both callbacks
3202
 * \param f_get_cache    session get callback
3203
 * \param f_set_cache    session set callback
3204
 */
3205
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_cache(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3206
                                    void *p_cache,
3207
                                    mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t *f_get_cache,
3208
                                    mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t *f_set_cache);
3209
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3210
3211
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
3212
/**
3213
 * \brief          Load a session for session resumption.
3214
 *
3215
 *                 Sessions loaded through this call will be considered
3216
 *                 for session resumption in the next handshake.
3217
 *
3218
 * \note           Even if this call succeeds, it is not guaranteed that
3219
 *                 the next handshake will indeed be shortened through the
3220
 *                 use of session resumption: The server is always free
3221
 *                 to reject any attempt for resumption and fall back to
3222
 *                 a full handshake.
3223
 *
3224
 * \note           This function can handle a variety of mechanisms for session
3225
 *                 resumption: For TLS 1.2, both session ID-based resumption
3226
 *                 and ticket-based resumption will be considered. For TLS 1.3,
3227
 *                 sessions equate to tickets, and loading one session by
3228
 *                 calling this function will lead to its corresponding ticket
3229
 *                 being advertised as resumption PSK by the client. This
3230
 *                 depends on session tickets being enabled (see
3231
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option) though.
3232
 *                 If session tickets are disabled, a call to this function
3233
 *                 with a TLS 1.3 session, will not have any effect on the next
3234
 *                 handshake for the SSL context \p ssl.
3235
 *
3236
 * \param ssl      The SSL context representing the connection which should
3237
 *                 be attempted to be setup using session resumption. This
3238
 *                 must be initialized via mbedtls_ssl_init() and bound to
3239
 *                 an SSL configuration via mbedtls_ssl_setup(), but
3240
 *                 the handshake must not yet have been started.
3241
 * \param session  The session to be considered for session resumption.
3242
 *                 This must be a session previously exported via
3243
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_session(), and potentially serialized and
3244
 *                 deserialized through mbedtls_ssl_session_save() and
3245
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_load() in the meantime.
3246
 *
3247
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3248
 * \return         \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if the session
3249
 *                 could not be loaded because one session has already been
3250
 *                 loaded. This error is non-fatal, and has no observable
3251
 *                 effect on the SSL context or the session that was attempted
3252
 *                 to be loaded.
3253
 * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3254
 *
3255
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_session()
3256
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_session_load()
3257
 */
3258
int mbedtls_ssl_set_session(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
3259
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
3260
3261
/**
3262
 * \brief          Load serialized session data into a session structure.
3263
 *                 On client, this can be used for loading saved sessions
3264
 *                 before resuming them with mbedtls_ssl_set_session().
3265
 *                 On server, this can be used for alternative implementations
3266
 *                 of session cache or session tickets.
3267
 *
3268
 * \warning        If a peer certificate chain is associated with the session,
3269
 *                 the serialized state will only contain the peer's
3270
 *                 end-entity certificate and the result of the chain
3271
 *                 verification (unless verification was disabled), but not
3272
 *                 the rest of the chain.
3273
 *
3274
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_session_save()
3275
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_set_session()
3276
 *
3277
 * \param session  The session structure to be populated. It must have been
3278
 *                 initialised with mbedtls_ssl_session_init() but not
3279
 *                 populated yet.
3280
 * \param buf      The buffer holding the serialized session data. It must be a
3281
 *                 readable buffer of at least \p len bytes.
3282
 * \param len      The size of the serialized data in bytes.
3283
 *
3284
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3285
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed.
3286
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
3287
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH if the serialized data
3288
 *                 was generated in a different version or configuration of
3289
 *                 Mbed TLS.
3290
 * \return         Another negative value for other kinds of errors (for
3291
 *                 example, unsupported features in the embedded certificate).
3292
 */
3293
int mbedtls_ssl_session_load(mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
3294
                             const unsigned char *buf,
3295
                             size_t len);
3296
3297
/**
3298
 * \brief          Save session structure as serialized data in a buffer.
3299
 *                 On client, this can be used for saving session data,
3300
 *                 potentially in non-volatile storage, for resuming later.
3301
 *                 On server, this can be used for alternative implementations
3302
 *                 of session cache or session tickets.
3303
 *
3304
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_session_load()
3305
 *
3306
 * \param session  The session structure to be saved.
3307
 * \param buf      The buffer to write the serialized data to. It must be a
3308
 *                 writeable buffer of at least \p buf_len bytes, or may be \c
3309
 *                 NULL if \p buf_len is \c 0.
3310
 * \param buf_len  The number of bytes available for writing in \p buf.
3311
 * \param olen     The size in bytes of the data that has been or would have
3312
 *                 been written. It must point to a valid \c size_t.
3313
 *
3314
 * \note           \p olen is updated to the correct value regardless of
3315
 *                 whether \p buf_len was large enough. This makes it possible
3316
 *                 to determine the necessary size by calling this function
3317
 *                 with \p buf set to \c NULL and \p buf_len to \c 0.
3318
 *
3319
 * \note           For TLS 1.3 sessions, this feature is supported only if the
3320
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option is enabled,
3321
 *                 as in TLS 1.3 session resumption is possible only with
3322
 *                 tickets.
3323
 *
3324
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3325
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL if \p buf is too small.
3326
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if the
3327
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option is disabled
3328
 *                 and the session is a TLS 1.3 session.
3329
 */
3330
int mbedtls_ssl_session_save(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
3331
                             unsigned char *buf,
3332
                             size_t buf_len,
3333
                             size_t *olen);
3334
3335
/**
3336
 * \brief               Set the list of allowed ciphersuites and the preference
3337
 *                      order. First in the list has the highest preference.
3338
 *
3339
 *                      For TLS 1.2, the notion of ciphersuite determines both
3340
 *                      the key exchange mechanism and the suite of symmetric
3341
 *                      algorithms to be used during and after the handshake.
3342
 *
3343
 *                      For TLS 1.3 (in development), the notion of ciphersuite
3344
 *                      only determines the suite of symmetric algorithms to be
3345
 *                      used during and after the handshake, while key exchange
3346
 *                      mechanisms are configured separately.
3347
 *
3348
 *                      In Mbed TLS, ciphersuites for both TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3
3349
 *                      are configured via this function. For users of TLS 1.3,
3350
 *                      there will be separate API for the configuration of key
3351
 *                      exchange mechanisms.
3352
 *
3353
 *                      The list of ciphersuites passed to this function may
3354
 *                      contain a mixture of TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3 ciphersuite
3355
 *                      identifiers. This is useful if negotiation of TLS 1.3
3356
 *                      should be attempted, but a fallback to TLS 1.2 would
3357
 *                      be tolerated.
3358
 *
3359
 * \note                By default, the server chooses its preferred
3360
 *                      ciphersuite among those that the client supports. If
3361
 *                      mbedtls_ssl_conf_preference_order() is called to prefer
3362
 *                      the client's preferences, the server instead chooses
3363
 *                      the client's preferred ciphersuite among those that
3364
 *                      the server supports.
3365
 *
3366
 * \warning             The ciphersuites array \p ciphersuites is not copied.
3367
 *                      It must remain valid for the lifetime of the SSL
3368
 *                      configuration \p conf.
3369
 *
3370
 * \param conf          The SSL configuration to modify.
3371
 * \param ciphersuites  A 0-terminated list of IANA identifiers of supported
3372
 *                      ciphersuites, accessible through \c MBEDTLS_TLS_XXX
3373
 *                      and \c MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_XXX macros defined in
3374
 *                      ssl_ciphersuites.h.
3375
 */
3376
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3377
                                   const int *ciphersuites);
3378
3379
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
3380
/**
3381
 * \brief Set the supported key exchange modes for TLS 1.3 connections.
3382
 *
3383
 *        In contrast to TLS 1.2, the ciphersuite concept in TLS 1.3 does not
3384
 *        include the choice of key exchange mechanism. It is therefore not
3385
 *        covered by the API mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(). See the
3386
 *        documentation of mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites() for more
3387
 *        information on the ciphersuite concept in TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3.
3388
 *
3389
 *        The present function is specific to TLS 1.3 and allows users to
3390
 *        configure the set of supported key exchange mechanisms in TLS 1.3.
3391
 *
3392
 * \param conf       The SSL configuration the change should apply to.
3393
 * \param kex_modes  A bitwise combination of one or more of the following:
3394
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK
3395
 *                     This flag enables pure-PSK key exchanges.
3396
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL
3397
 *                     This flag enables combined PSK-ephemeral key exchanges.
3398
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL
3399
 *                     This flag enables pure-ephemeral key exchanges.
3400
 *                   For convenience, the following pre-defined macros are
3401
 *                   available for combinations of the above:
3402
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_ALL
3403
 *                     Includes all of pure-PSK, PSK-ephemeral and pure-ephemeral.
3404
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_ALL
3405
 *                     Includes both pure-PSK and combined PSK-ephemeral
3406
 *                     key exchanges, but excludes pure-ephemeral key exchanges.
3407
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL_ALL
3408
 *                     Includes both pure-ephemeral and combined PSK-ephemeral
3409
 *                     key exchanges.
3410
 *
3411
 * \note  If a PSK-based key exchange mode shall be supported, applications
3412
 *        must also use the APIs mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3413
 *        mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()
3414
 *        to configure the PSKs to be used.
3415
 *
3416
 * \note  If a pure-ephemeral key exchange mode shall be supported,
3417
 *        server-side applications must also provide a certificate via
3418
 *        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert().
3419
 *
3420
 */
3421
3422
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_key_exchange_modes(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3423
                                               const int kex_modes);
3424
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
3425
3426
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
3427
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_IGNORE 0
3428
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_FAIL   1
3429
/**
3430
 * \brief               Specify the length of Connection IDs for incoming
3431
 *                      encrypted DTLS records, as well as the behaviour
3432
 *                      on unexpected CIDs.
3433
 *
3434
 *                      By default, the CID length is set to \c 0,
3435
 *                      and unexpected CIDs are silently ignored.
3436
 *
3437
 * \param conf          The SSL configuration to modify.
3438
 * \param len           The length in Bytes of the CID fields in encrypted
3439
 *                      DTLS records using the CID mechanism. This must
3440
 *                      not be larger than #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX.
3441
 * \param ignore_other_cids This determines the stack's behaviour when
3442
 *                          receiving a record with an unexpected CID.
3443
 *                          Possible values are:
3444
 *                          - #MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_IGNORE
3445
 *                            In this case, the record is silently ignored.
3446
 *                          - #MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_FAIL
3447
 *                            In this case, the stack fails with the specific
3448
 *                            error code #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID.
3449
 *
3450
 * \note                The CID specification allows implementations to either
3451
 *                      use a common length for all incoming connection IDs or
3452
 *                      allow variable-length incoming IDs. Mbed TLS currently
3453
 *                      requires a common length for all connections sharing the
3454
 *                      same SSL configuration; this allows simpler parsing of
3455
 *                      record headers.
3456
 *
3457
 * \return              \c 0 on success.
3458
 * \return              #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if \p len
3459
 *                      is too large.
3460
 */
3461
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_cid(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, size_t len,
3462
                         int ignore_other_cids);
3463
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
3464
3465
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
3466
/**
3467
 * \brief          Set the X.509 security profile used for verification
3468
 *
3469
 * \note           The restrictions are enforced for all certificates in the
3470
 *                 chain. However, signatures in the handshake are not covered
3471
 *                 by this setting but by \b mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_hashes().
3472
 *
3473
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3474
 * \param profile  Profile to use
3475
 */
3476
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3477
                                   const mbedtls_x509_crt_profile *profile);
3478
3479
/**
3480
 * \brief          Set the data required to verify peer certificate
3481
 *
3482
 * \note           See \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify() for notes regarding the
3483
 *                 parameters ca_chain (maps to trust_ca for that function)
3484
 *                 and ca_crl.
3485
 *
3486
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3487
 * \param ca_chain trusted CA chain (meaning all fully trusted top-level CAs)
3488
 * \param ca_crl   trusted CA CRLs
3489
 */
3490
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3491
                               mbedtls_x509_crt *ca_chain,
3492
                               mbedtls_x509_crl *ca_crl);
3493
3494
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
3495
/**
3496
 * \brief          Set DN hints sent to client in CertificateRequest message
3497
 *
3498
 * \note           If not set, subject distinguished names (DNs) are taken
3499
 *                 from \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain()
3500
 *                 or \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain())
3501
 *
3502
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3503
 * \param crt      crt chain whose subject DNs are issuer DNs of client certs
3504
 *                 from which the client should select client peer certificate.
3505
 */
3506
static inline
3507
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dn_hints(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3508
                               const mbedtls_x509_crt *crt)
3509
0
{
3510
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dn_hints) = crt;
3511
0
}
3512
#endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED */
3513
3514
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK)
3515
/**
3516
 * \brief          Set the trusted certificate callback.
3517
 *
3518
 *                 This API allows to register the set of trusted certificates
3519
 *                 through a callback, instead of a linked list as configured
3520
 *                 by mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain().
3521
 *
3522
 *                 This is useful for example in contexts where a large number
3523
 *                 of CAs are used, and the inefficiency of maintaining them
3524
 *                 in a linked list cannot be tolerated. It is also useful when
3525
 *                 the set of trusted CAs needs to be modified frequently.
3526
 *
3527
 *                 See the documentation of `mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t` for
3528
 *                 more information.
3529
 *
3530
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
3531
 * \param f_ca_cb  The trusted certificate callback to use when verifying
3532
 *                 certificate chains.
3533
 * \param p_ca_cb  The context to be passed to \p f_ca_cb (for example,
3534
 *                 a reference to a trusted CA database).
3535
 *
3536
 * \note           This API is incompatible with mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain():
3537
 *                 Any call to this function overwrites the values set through
3538
 *                 earlier calls to mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain() or
3539
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb().
3540
 *
3541
 * \note           This API is incompatible with CA indication in
3542
 *                 CertificateRequest messages: A server-side SSL context which
3543
 *                 is bound to an SSL configuration that uses a CA callback
3544
 *                 configured via mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(), and which requires
3545
 *                 client authentication, will send an empty CA list in the
3546
 *                 corresponding CertificateRequest message.
3547
 *
3548
 * \note           This API is incompatible with mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain():
3549
 *                 If an SSL context is bound to an SSL configuration which uses
3550
 *                 CA callbacks configured via mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(), then
3551
 *                 calls to mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain() have no effect.
3552
 *
3553
 * \note           The use of this API disables the use of restartable ECC
3554
 *                 during X.509 CRT signature verification (but doesn't affect
3555
 *                 other uses).
3556
 *
3557
 * \warning        This API is incompatible with the use of CRLs. Any call to
3558
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb() unsets CRLs configured through
3559
 *                 earlier calls to mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain().
3560
 *
3561
 * \warning        In multi-threaded environments, the callback \p f_ca_cb
3562
 *                 must be thread-safe, and it is the user's responsibility
3563
 *                 to guarantee this (for example through a mutex
3564
 *                 contained in the callback context pointed to by \p p_ca_cb).
3565
 */
3566
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3567
                            mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t f_ca_cb,
3568
                            void *p_ca_cb);
3569
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK */
3570
3571
/**
3572
 * \brief          Set own certificate chain and private key
3573
 *
3574
 * \note           own_cert should contain in order from the bottom up your
3575
 *                 certificate chain. The top certificate (self-signed)
3576
 *                 can be omitted.
3577
 *
3578
 * \note           On server, this function can be called multiple times to
3579
 *                 provision more than one cert/key pair (eg one ECDSA, one
3580
 *                 RSA with SHA-256, one RSA with SHA-1). An adequate
3581
 *                 certificate will be selected according to the client's
3582
 *                 advertised capabilities. In case multiple certificates are
3583
 *                 adequate, preference is given to the one set by the first
3584
 *                 call to this function, then second, etc.
3585
 *
3586
 * \note           On client, only the first call has any effect. That is,
3587
 *                 only one client certificate can be provisioned. The
3588
 *                 server's preferences in its CertificateRequest message will
3589
 *                 be ignored and our only cert will be sent regardless of
3590
 *                 whether it matches those preferences - the server can then
3591
 *                 decide what it wants to do with it.
3592
 *
3593
 * \note           The provided \p pk_key needs to match the public key in the
3594
 *                 first certificate in \p own_cert, or all handshakes using
3595
 *                 that certificate will fail. It is your responsibility
3596
 *                 to ensure that; this function will not perform any check.
3597
 *                 You may use mbedtls_pk_check_pair() in order to perform
3598
 *                 this check yourself, but be aware that this function can
3599
 *                 be computationally expensive on some key types.
3600
 *
3601
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3602
 * \param own_cert own public certificate chain
3603
 * \param pk_key   own private key
3604
 *
3605
 * \return         0 on success or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED
3606
 */
3607
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3608
                              mbedtls_x509_crt *own_cert,
3609
                              mbedtls_pk_context *pk_key);
3610
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
3611
3612
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
3613
/**
3614
 * \brief          Configure pre-shared keys (PSKs) and their
3615
 *                 identities to be used in PSK-based ciphersuites.
3616
 *
3617
 *                 Only one PSK can be registered, through either
3618
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3619
 *                 If you attempt to register more than one PSK, this function
3620
 *                 fails, though this may change in future versions, which
3621
 *                 may add support for multiple PSKs.
3622
 *
3623
 * \note           This is mainly useful for clients. Servers will usually
3624
 *                 want to use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() instead.
3625
 *
3626
 * \note           A PSK set by \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk() in the PSK callback
3627
 *                 takes precedence over a PSK configured by this function.
3628
 *
3629
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the PSK with.
3630
 * \param psk      The pointer to the pre-shared key to use.
3631
 * \param psk_len  The length of the pre-shared key in bytes.
3632
 * \param psk_identity      The pointer to the pre-shared key identity.
3633
 * \param psk_identity_len  The length of the pre-shared key identity
3634
 *                          in bytes.
3635
 *
3636
 * \note           The PSK and its identity are copied internally and
3637
 *                 hence need not be preserved by the caller for the lifetime
3638
 *                 of the SSL configuration.
3639
 *
3640
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3641
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if no more PSKs
3642
 *                 can be configured. In this case, the old PSK(s) remain intact.
3643
 * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3644
 */
3645
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3646
                         const unsigned char *psk, size_t psk_len,
3647
                         const unsigned char *psk_identity, size_t psk_identity_len);
3648
3649
#if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
3650
/**
3651
 * \brief          Configure one or more opaque pre-shared keys (PSKs) and
3652
 *                 their identities to be used in PSK-based ciphersuites.
3653
 *
3654
 *                 Only one PSK can be registered, through either
3655
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3656
 *                 If you attempt to register more than one PSK, this function
3657
 *                 fails, though this may change in future versions, which
3658
 *                 may add support for multiple PSKs.
3659
 *
3660
 * \note           This is mainly useful for clients. Servers will usually
3661
 *                 want to use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() instead.
3662
 *
3663
 * \note           An opaque PSK set by \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque() in
3664
 *                 the PSK callback takes precedence over an opaque PSK
3665
 *                 configured by this function.
3666
 *
3667
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the PSK with.
3668
 * \param psk      The identifier of the key slot holding the PSK.
3669
 *                 Until \p conf is destroyed or this function is successfully
3670
 *                 called again, the key slot \p psk must be populated with a
3671
 *                 key of type PSA_ALG_CATEGORY_KEY_DERIVATION whose policy
3672
 *                 allows its use for the key derivation algorithm applied
3673
 *                 in the handshake.
3674
 * \param psk_identity      The pointer to the pre-shared key identity.
3675
 * \param psk_identity_len  The length of the pre-shared key identity
3676
 *                          in bytes.
3677
 *
3678
 * \note           The PSK identity hint is copied internally and hence need
3679
 *                 not be preserved by the caller for the lifetime of the
3680
 *                 SSL configuration.
3681
 *
3682
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3683
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if no more PSKs
3684
 *                 can be configured. In this case, the old PSK(s) remain intact.
3685
 * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3686
 */
3687
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3688
                                mbedtls_svc_key_id_t psk,
3689
                                const unsigned char *psk_identity,
3690
                                size_t psk_identity_len);
3691
#endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
3692
3693
/**
3694
 * \brief          Set the pre-shared Key (PSK) for the current handshake.
3695
 *
3696
 * \note           This should only be called inside the PSK callback,
3697
 *                 i.e. the function passed to \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb().
3698
 *
3699
 * \note           A PSK set by this function takes precedence over a PSK
3700
 *                 configured by \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
3701
 *
3702
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to configure a PSK for.
3703
 * \param psk      The pointer to the pre-shared key.
3704
 * \param psk_len  The length of the pre-shared key in bytes.
3705
 *
3706
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3707
 * \return         An \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_XXX error code on failure.
3708
 */
3709
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3710
                           const unsigned char *psk, size_t psk_len);
3711
3712
#if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
3713
/**
3714
 * \brief          Set an opaque pre-shared Key (PSK) for the current handshake.
3715
 *
3716
 * \note           This should only be called inside the PSK callback,
3717
 *                 i.e. the function passed to \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb().
3718
 *
3719
 * \note           An opaque PSK set by this function takes precedence over an
3720
 *                 opaque PSK configured by \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3721
 *
3722
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to configure a PSK for.
3723
 * \param psk      The identifier of the key slot holding the PSK.
3724
 *                 For the duration of the current handshake, the key slot
3725
 *                 must be populated with a key of type
3726
 *                 PSA_ALG_CATEGORY_KEY_DERIVATION whose policy allows its
3727
 *                 use for the key derivation algorithm
3728
 *                 applied in the handshake.
3729
 *
3730
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3731
 * \return         An \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_XXX error code on failure.
3732
 */
3733
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3734
                                  mbedtls_svc_key_id_t psk);
3735
#endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
3736
3737
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3738
/**
3739
 * \brief          Set the PSK callback (server-side only).
3740
 *
3741
 *                 If set, the PSK callback is called for each
3742
 *                 handshake where a PSK-based ciphersuite was negotiated.
3743
 *                 The caller provides the identity received and wants to
3744
 *                 receive the actual PSK data and length.
3745
 *
3746
 *                 The callback has the following parameters:
3747
 *                 - \c void*: The opaque pointer \p p_psk.
3748
 *                 - \c mbedtls_ssl_context*: The SSL context to which
3749
 *                                            the operation applies.
3750
 *                 - \c const unsigned char*: The PSK identity
3751
 *                                            selected by the client.
3752
 *                 - \c size_t: The length of the PSK identity
3753
 *                              selected by the client.
3754
 *
3755
 *                 If a valid PSK identity is found, the callback should use
3756
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk() or
3757
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque()
3758
 *                 on the SSL context to set the correct PSK and return \c 0.
3759
 *                 Any other return value will result in a denied PSK identity.
3760
 *
3761
 * \note           A dynamic PSK (i.e. set by the PSK callback) takes
3762
 *                 precedence over a static PSK (i.e. set by
3763
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3764
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()).
3765
 *                 This means that if you set a PSK callback using this
3766
 *                 function, you don't need to set a PSK using
3767
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3768
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()).
3769
 *
3770
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
3771
 * \param f_psk    The callback for selecting and setting the PSK based
3772
 *                 in the PSK identity chosen by the client.
3773
 * \param p_psk    A pointer to an opaque structure to be passed to
3774
 *                 the callback, for example a PSK store.
3775
 */
3776
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3777
                             int (*f_psk)(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *,
3778
                                          size_t),
3779
                             void *p_psk);
3780
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3781
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED */
3782
3783
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3784
/**
3785
 * \brief          Set the Diffie-Hellman public P and G values
3786
 *                 from big-endian binary presentations.
3787
 *                 (Default values: MBEDTLS_DHM_RFC3526_MODP_2048_[PG]_BIN)
3788
 *
3789
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3790
 * \param dhm_P    Diffie-Hellman-Merkle modulus in big-endian binary form
3791
 * \param P_len    Length of DHM modulus
3792
 * \param dhm_G    Diffie-Hellman-Merkle generator in big-endian binary form
3793
 * \param G_len    Length of DHM generator
3794
 *
3795
 * \return         0 if successful
3796
 */
3797
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dh_param_bin(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3798
                                  const unsigned char *dhm_P, size_t P_len,
3799
                                  const unsigned char *dhm_G,  size_t G_len);
3800
3801
/**
3802
 * \brief          Set the Diffie-Hellman public P and G values,
3803
 *                 read from existing context (server-side only)
3804
 *
3805
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3806
 * \param dhm_ctx  Diffie-Hellman-Merkle context
3807
 *
3808
 * \return         0 if successful
3809
 */
3810
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dh_param_ctx(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, mbedtls_dhm_context *dhm_ctx);
3811
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DHM_C && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) */
3812
3813
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
3814
/**
3815
 * \brief          Set the minimum length for Diffie-Hellman parameters.
3816
 *                 (Client-side only.)
3817
 *                 (Default: 1024 bits.)
3818
 *
3819
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3820
 * \param bitlen   Minimum bit length of the DHM prime
3821
 */
3822
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dhm_min_bitlen(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3823
                                     unsigned int bitlen);
3824
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DHM_C && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
3825
3826
#if defined(MBEDTLS_ECP_C)
3827
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
3828
/**
3829
 * \brief          Set the allowed curves in order of preference.
3830
 *
3831
 *                 On server: this only affects selection of the ECDHE curve;
3832
 *                 the curves used for ECDH and ECDSA are determined by the
3833
 *                 list of available certificates instead.
3834
 *
3835
 *                 On client: this affects the list of curves offered for any
3836
 *                 use. The server can override our preference order.
3837
 *
3838
 *                 Both sides: limits the set of curves accepted for use in
3839
 *                 ECDHE and in the peer's end-entity certificate.
3840
 *
3841
 * \deprecated     Superseded by mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups().
3842
 *
3843
 * \note           This has no influence on which curves are allowed inside the
3844
 *                 certificate chains, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile()
3845
 *                 for that. For the end-entity certificate however, the key
3846
 *                 will be accepted only if it is allowed both by this list
3847
 *                 and by the cert profile.
3848
 *
3849
 * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
3850
 *                 (preferred curve first).
3851
 *
3852
 * \note           The default list is the same set of curves that
3853
 *                 #mbedtls_x509_crt_profile_default allows, plus
3854
 *                 ECDHE-only curves selected according to the same criteria.
3855
 *                 The order favors curves with the lowest resource usage.
3856
 *
3857
 * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS may extend this list,
3858
 *                 for example if new curves are added to the library.
3859
 *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
3860
 *                 from this list unless serious security concerns require it.
3861
 *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS may change the order in
3862
 *                 keeping with the general principle of favoring the lowest
3863
 *                 resource usage.
3864
 *
3865
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3866
 * \param curves   Ordered list of allowed curves,
3867
 *                 terminated by MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_NONE.
3868
 */
3869
void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3870
                                                const mbedtls_ecp_group_id *curves);
3871
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
3872
#endif /* MBEDTLS_ECP_C */
3873
3874
/**
3875
 * \brief          Set the allowed groups in order of preference.
3876
 *
3877
 *                 On server: This only affects the choice of key agreement mechanism
3878
 *
3879
 *                 On client: this affects the list of groups offered for any
3880
 *                 use. The server can override our preference order.
3881
 *
3882
 *                 Both sides: limits the set of groups accepted for use in
3883
 *                 key sharing.
3884
 *
3885
 * \note           This function replaces the deprecated mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves(),
3886
 *                 which only allows ECP curves to be configured.
3887
 *
3888
 * \note           The most recent invocation of either mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves()
3889
 *                 or mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups() nullifies all previous invocations
3890
 *                 of both.
3891
 *
3892
 * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
3893
 *                 (preferred group first).
3894
 *
3895
 * \note           When this function is not called, a default list is used,
3896
 *                 consisting of all supported curves at 255 bits and above,
3897
 *                 and all supported finite fields at 2048 bits and above.
3898
 *                 The order favors groups with the lowest resource usage.
3899
 *
3900
 * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
3901
 *                 from the default list unless serious security concerns require it.
3902
 *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS may change the order in
3903
 *                 keeping with the general principle of favoring the lowest
3904
 *                 resource usage.
3905
 *
3906
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3907
 * \param groups   List of allowed groups ordered by preference, terminated by 0.
3908
 *                 Must contain valid IANA NamedGroup IDs (provided via either an integer
3909
 *                 or using MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_NAMED_GROUP_XXX macros).
3910
 */
3911
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3912
                             const uint16_t *groups);
3913
3914
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED)
3915
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2)
3916
/**
3917
 * \brief          Set the allowed hashes for signatures during the handshake.
3918
 *
3919
 * \note           This only affects which hashes are offered and can be used
3920
 *                 for signatures during the handshake. Hashes for message
3921
 *                 authentication and the TLS PRF are controlled by the
3922
 *                 ciphersuite, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(). Hashes
3923
 *                 used for certificate signature are controlled by the
3924
 *                 verification profile, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile().
3925
 *
3926
 * \deprecated     Superseded by mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_algs().
3927
 *
3928
 * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
3929
 *                 (preferred hash first).
3930
 *
3931
 * \note           By default, all supported hashes whose length is at least
3932
 *                 256 bits are allowed. This is the same set as the default
3933
 *                 for certificate verification
3934
 *                 (#mbedtls_x509_crt_profile_default).
3935
 *                 The preference order is currently unspecified and may
3936
 *                 change in future versions.
3937
 *
3938
 * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS may extend this list,
3939
 *                 for example if new curves are added to the library.
3940
 *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
3941
 *                 from this list unless serious security concerns require it.
3942
 *
3943
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3944
 * \param hashes   Ordered list of allowed signature hashes,
3945
 *                 terminated by \c MBEDTLS_MD_NONE.
3946
 */
3947
void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_hashes(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3948
                                                    const int *hashes);
3949
#endif /* !MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED && MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2 */
3950
3951
/**
3952
 * \brief          Configure allowed signature algorithms for use in TLS
3953
 *
3954
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to use.
3955
 * \param sig_algs List of allowed IANA values for TLS 1.3 signature algorithms,
3956
 *                 terminated by #MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_NONE. The list must remain
3957
 *                 available throughout the lifetime of the conf object.
3958
 *                 - For TLS 1.3, values of \c MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_XXXX should be
3959
 *                   used.
3960
 *                 - For TLS 1.2, values should be given as
3961
 *                   "(HashAlgorithm << 8) | SignatureAlgorithm".
3962
 */
3963
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_algs(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3964
                               const uint16_t *sig_algs);
3965
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED */
3966
3967
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
3968
/**
3969
 * \brief          Set or reset the hostname to check against the received
3970
 *                 server certificate. It sets the ServerName TLS extension,
3971
 *                 too, if that extension is enabled. (client-side only)
3972
 *
3973
 * \param ssl      SSL context
3974
 * \param hostname the server hostname, may be NULL to clear hostname
3975
3976
 * \note           Maximum hostname length MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_HOST_NAME_LEN.
3977
 *
3978
 * \return         0 if successful, MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED on
3979
 *                 allocation failure, MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA on
3980
 *                 too long input hostname.
3981
 *
3982
 *                 Hostname set to the one provided on success (cleared
3983
 *                 when NULL). On allocation failure hostname is cleared.
3984
 *                 On too long input failure, old hostname is unchanged.
3985
 */
3986
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const char *hostname);
3987
3988
/**
3989
 * \brief          Get the hostname that checked against the received
3990
 *                 server certificate. It is used to set the ServerName
3991
 *                 TLS extension, too, if that extension is enabled.
3992
 *                 (client-side only)
3993
 *
3994
 * \param ssl      SSL context
3995
 *
3996
 * \return         const pointer to the hostname value
3997
 */
3998
static inline const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_hostname(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
3999
0
{
4000
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);
4001
0
}
4002
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
4003
4004
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION)
4005
/**
4006
 * \brief          Retrieve SNI extension value for the current handshake.
4007
 *                 Available in \c f_cert_cb of \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb(),
4008
 *                 this is the same value passed to \c f_sni callback of
4009
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni() and may be used instead of
4010
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni().
4011
 *
4012
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4013
 * \param name_len pointer into which to store length of returned value.
4014
 *                 0 if SNI extension is not present or not yet processed.
4015
 *
4016
 * \return         const pointer to SNI extension value.
4017
 *                 - value is valid only when called in \c f_cert_cb
4018
 *                   registered with \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb().
4019
 *                 - value is NULL if SNI extension is not present.
4020
 *                 - value is not '\0'-terminated. Use \c name_len for len.
4021
 *                 - value must not be freed.
4022
 */
4023
const unsigned char *mbedtls_ssl_get_hs_sni(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4024
                                            size_t *name_len);
4025
4026
/**
4027
 * \brief          Set own certificate and key for the current handshake
4028
 *
4029
 * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() but for use within
4030
 *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4031
 *
4032
 * \note           Passing null \c own_cert clears the certificate list for
4033
 *                 the current handshake.
4034
 *
4035
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4036
 * \param own_cert own public certificate chain
4037
 * \param pk_key   own private key
4038
 *
4039
 * \return         0 on success or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED
4040
 */
4041
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_own_cert(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4042
                                mbedtls_x509_crt *own_cert,
4043
                                mbedtls_pk_context *pk_key);
4044
4045
/**
4046
 * \brief          Set the data required to verify peer certificate for the
4047
 *                 current handshake
4048
 *
4049
 * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain() but for use within
4050
 *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4051
 *
4052
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4053
 * \param ca_chain trusted CA chain (meaning all fully trusted top-level CAs)
4054
 * \param ca_crl   trusted CA CRLs
4055
 */
4056
void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4057
                                 mbedtls_x509_crt *ca_chain,
4058
                                 mbedtls_x509_crl *ca_crl);
4059
4060
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
4061
/**
4062
 * \brief          Set DN hints sent to client in CertificateRequest message
4063
 *
4064
 * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_dn_hints() but for use within
4065
 *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4066
 *
4067
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4068
 * \param crt      crt chain whose subject DNs are issuer DNs of client certs
4069
 *                 from which the client should select client peer certificate.
4070
 */
4071
void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_dn_hints(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4072
                                 const mbedtls_x509_crt *crt);
4073
#endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED */
4074
4075
/**
4076
 * \brief          Set authmode for the current handshake.
4077
 *
4078
 * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_authmode() but for use within
4079
 *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4080
 *
4081
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4082
 * \param authmode MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE, MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL or
4083
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED
4084
 */
4085
void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_authmode(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4086
                                 int authmode);
4087
4088
/**
4089
 * \brief          Set server side ServerName TLS extension callback
4090
 *                 (optional, server-side only).
4091
 *
4092
 *                 If set, the ServerName callback is called whenever the
4093
 *                 server receives a ServerName TLS extension from the client
4094
 *                 during a handshake. The ServerName callback has the
4095
 *                 following parameters: (void *parameter, mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4096
 *                 const unsigned char *hostname, size_t len). If a suitable
4097
 *                 certificate is found, the callback must set the
4098
 *                 certificate(s) and key(s) to use with \c
4099
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_own_cert() (can be called repeatedly),
4100
 *                 and may optionally adjust the CA and associated CRL with \c
4101
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain() as well as the client
4102
 *                 authentication mode with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_authmode(),
4103
 *                 then must return 0. If no matching name is found, the
4104
 *                 callback may return non-zero to abort the handshake.
4105
 *
4106
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4107
 * \param f_sni    verification function
4108
 * \param p_sni    verification parameter
4109
 */
4110
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4111
                          int (*f_sni)(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *,
4112
                                       size_t),
4113
                          void *p_sni);
4114
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION */
4115
4116
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED)
4117
/**
4118
 * \brief          Set the EC J-PAKE password for current handshake.
4119
 *
4120
 * \note           An internal copy is made, and destroyed as soon as the
4121
 *                 handshake is completed, or when the SSL context is reset or
4122
 *                 freed.
4123
 *
4124
 * \note           The SSL context needs to be already set up. The right place
4125
 *                 to call this function is between \c mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
4126
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_reset() and \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
4127
 *                 Password cannot be empty (see RFC 8236).
4128
 *
4129
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4130
 * \param pw       EC J-PAKE password (pre-shared secret). It cannot be empty
4131
 * \param pw_len   length of pw in bytes
4132
 *
4133
 * \return         0 on success, or a negative error code.
4134
 */
4135
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ecjpake_password(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4136
                                        const unsigned char *pw,
4137
                                        size_t pw_len);
4138
4139
/**
4140
 * \brief          Set the EC J-PAKE opaque password for current handshake.
4141
 *
4142
 * \note           The key must remain valid until the handshake is over.
4143
 *
4144
 * \note           The SSL context needs to be already set up. The right place
4145
 *                 to call this function is between \c mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
4146
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_reset() and \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
4147
 *
4148
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4149
 * \param pwd      EC J-PAKE opaque password
4150
 *
4151
 * \return         0 on success, or a negative error code.
4152
 */
4153
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ecjpake_password_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4154
                                               mbedtls_svc_key_id_t pwd);
4155
#endif /*MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED */
4156
4157
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
4158
/**
4159
 * \brief          Set the supported Application Layer Protocols.
4160
 *
4161
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4162
 * \param protos   Pointer to a NULL-terminated list of supported protocols,
4163
 *                 in decreasing preference order. The pointer to the list is
4164
 *                 recorded by the library for later reference as required, so
4165
 *                 the lifetime of the table must be at least as long as the
4166
 *                 lifetime of the SSL configuration structure.
4167
 *
4168
 * \return         0 on success, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA.
4169
 */
4170
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_alpn_protocols(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, const char **protos);
4171
4172
/**
4173
 * \brief          Get the name of the negotiated Application Layer Protocol.
4174
 *                 This function should be called after the handshake is
4175
 *                 completed.
4176
 *
4177
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4178
 *
4179
 * \return         Protocol name, or NULL if no protocol was negotiated.
4180
 */
4181
const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_alpn_protocol(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4182
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN */
4183
4184
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
4185
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DEBUG_C)
4186
static inline const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_srtp_profile_as_string(mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile profile)
4187
0
{
4188
0
    switch (profile) {
4189
0
        case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80:
4190
0
            return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80";
4191
0
        case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32:
4192
0
            return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32";
4193
0
        case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80:
4194
0
            return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80";
4195
0
        case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32:
4196
0
            return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32";
4197
0
        default: break;
4198
0
    }
4199
0
    return "";
4200
0
}
4201
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEBUG_C */
4202
/**
4203
 * \brief                   Manage support for mki(master key id) value
4204
 *                          in use_srtp extension.
4205
 *                          MKI is an optional part of SRTP used for key management
4206
 *                          and re-keying. See RFC3711 section 3.1 for details.
4207
 *                          The default value is
4208
 *                          #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED.
4209
 *
4210
 * \param conf              The SSL configuration to manage mki support.
4211
 * \param support_mki_value Enable or disable mki usage. Values are
4212
 *                          #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED
4213
 *                          or #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_SUPPORTED.
4214
 */
4215
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_srtp_mki_value_supported(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4216
                                               int support_mki_value);
4217
4218
/**
4219
 * \brief                   Set the supported DTLS-SRTP protection profiles.
4220
 *
4221
 * \param conf              SSL configuration
4222
 * \param profiles          Pointer to a List of MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET terminated
4223
 *                          supported protection profiles
4224
 *                          in decreasing preference order.
4225
 *                          The pointer to the list is recorded by the library
4226
 *                          for later reference as required, so the lifetime
4227
 *                          of the table must be at least as long as the lifetime
4228
 *                          of the SSL configuration structure.
4229
 *                          The list must not hold more than
4230
 *                          MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_PROFILE_LIST_LENGTH elements
4231
 *                          (excluding the terminating MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET).
4232
 *
4233
 * \return                  0 on success
4234
 * \return                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA when the list of
4235
 *                          protection profiles is incorrect.
4236
 */
4237
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_srtp_protection_profiles
4238
    (mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4239
    const mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile *profiles);
4240
4241
/**
4242
 * \brief                  Set the mki_value for the current DTLS-SRTP session.
4243
 *
4244
 * \param ssl              SSL context to use.
4245
 * \param mki_value        The MKI value to set.
4246
 * \param mki_len          The length of the MKI value.
4247
 *
4248
 * \note                   This function is relevant on client side only.
4249
 *                         The server discovers the mki value during handshake.
4250
 *                         A mki value set on server side using this function
4251
 *                         is ignored.
4252
 *
4253
 * \return                 0 on success
4254
 * \return                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA
4255
 * \return                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE
4256
 */
4257
int mbedtls_ssl_dtls_srtp_set_mki_value(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4258
                                        unsigned char *mki_value,
4259
                                        uint16_t mki_len);
4260
/**
4261
 * \brief                  Get the negotiated DTLS-SRTP information:
4262
 *                         Protection profile and MKI value.
4263
 *
4264
 * \warning                This function must be called after the handshake is
4265
 *                         completed. The value returned by this function must
4266
 *                         not be trusted or acted upon before the handshake completes.
4267
 *
4268
 * \param ssl              The SSL context to query.
4269
 * \param dtls_srtp_info   The negotiated DTLS-SRTP information:
4270
 *                         - Protection profile in use.
4271
 *                         A direct mapping of the iana defined value for protection
4272
 *                         profile on an uint16_t.
4273
                   http://www.iana.org/assignments/srtp-protection/srtp-protection.xhtml
4274
 *                         #MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET if the use of SRTP was not negotiated
4275
 *                         or peer's Hello packet was not parsed yet.
4276
 *                         - mki size and value( if size is > 0 ).
4277
 */
4278
void mbedtls_ssl_get_dtls_srtp_negotiation_result(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4279
                                                  mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info *dtls_srtp_info);
4280
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
4281
4282
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
4283
/**
4284
 * \brief          Set the maximum supported version sent from the client side
4285
 *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4286
 *
4287
 *                 See also the documentation of mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_version().
4288
 *
4289
 * \note           This ignores ciphersuites from higher versions.
4290
 *
4291
 * \note           This function is deprecated and has been replaced by
4292
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_tls_version().
4293
 *
4294
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4295
 * \param major    Major version number (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3)
4296
 * \param minor    Minor version number
4297
 *                 (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3 for (D)TLS 1.2,
4298
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4 for TLS 1.3)
4299
 */
4300
void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int major,
4301
                                                     int minor);
4302
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
4303
4304
/**
4305
 * \brief          Set the maximum supported version sent from the client side
4306
 *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4307
 *
4308
 * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4309
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4310
 *                 negotiated.
4311
 *
4312
 * \param conf         SSL configuration
4313
 * \param tls_version  TLS protocol version number (\c mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version)
4314
 *                     (#MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN is not valid)
4315
 */
4316
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_tls_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4317
                                                    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version tls_version)
4318
0
{
4319
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_tls_version) = tls_version;
4320
0
}
4321
4322
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
4323
/**
4324
 * \brief          Set the minimum accepted SSL/TLS protocol version
4325
 *
4326
 * \note           By default, all supported versions are accepted.
4327
 *                 Future versions of the library may disable older
4328
 *                 protocol versions by default if they become deprecated.
4329
 *
4330
 * \note           The following versions are supported (if enabled at
4331
 *                 compile time):
4332
 *                 - (D)TLS 1.2: \p major = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3,
4333
 *                   \p minor = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3
4334
 *                 - TLS 1.3: \p major = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3,
4335
 *                   \p minor = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4
4336
 *
4337
 *                 Note that the numbers in the constant names are the
4338
 *                 TLS internal protocol numbers, and the minor versions
4339
 *                 differ by one from the human-readable versions!
4340
 *
4341
 * \note           Input outside of the SSL_MAX_XXXXX_VERSION and
4342
 *                 SSL_MIN_XXXXX_VERSION range is ignored.
4343
 *
4344
 * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4345
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4346
 *                 negotiated.
4347
 *
4348
 * \note           This function is deprecated and has been replaced by
4349
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_tls_version().
4350
 *
4351
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4352
 * \param major    Major version number (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3)
4353
 * \param minor    Minor version number
4354
 *                 (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3 for (D)TLS 1.2,
4355
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4 for TLS 1.3)
4356
 */
4357
void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int major,
4358
                                                     int minor);
4359
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
4360
4361
/**
4362
 * \brief          Set the minimum supported version sent from the client side
4363
 *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4364
 *
4365
 * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4366
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4367
 *                 negotiated.
4368
 *
4369
 * \param conf         SSL configuration
4370
 * \param tls_version  TLS protocol version number (\c mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version)
4371
 *                     (#MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN is not valid)
4372
 */
4373
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_tls_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4374
                                                    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version tls_version)
4375
0
{
4376
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(min_tls_version) = tls_version;
4377
0
}
4378
4379
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
4380
/**
4381
 * \brief           Enable or disable Encrypt-then-MAC
4382
 *                  (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED)
4383
 *
4384
 * \note            This should always be enabled, it is a security
4385
 *                  improvement, and should not cause any interoperability
4386
 *                  issue (used only if the peer supports it too).
4387
 *
4388
 * \param conf      SSL configuration
4389
 * \param etm       MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_DISABLED
4390
 */
4391
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_encrypt_then_mac(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char etm);
4392
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC */
4393
4394
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET)
4395
/**
4396
 * \brief           Enable or disable Extended Master Secret negotiation.
4397
 *                  (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED)
4398
 *
4399
 * \note            This should always be enabled, it is a security fix to the
4400
 *                  protocol, and should not cause any interoperability issue
4401
 *                  (used only if the peer supports it too).
4402
 *
4403
 * \param conf      SSL configuration
4404
 * \param ems       MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_DISABLED
4405
 */
4406
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_extended_master_secret(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char ems);
4407
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET */
4408
4409
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
4410
/**
4411
 * \brief          Whether to send a list of acceptable CAs in
4412
 *                 CertificateRequest messages.
4413
 *                 (Default: do send)
4414
 *
4415
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4416
 * \param cert_req_ca_list   MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_ENABLED or
4417
 *                          MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_DISABLED
4418
 */
4419
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_req_ca_list(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4420
                                       char cert_req_ca_list);
4421
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
4422
4423
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
4424
/**
4425
 * \brief          Set the maximum fragment length to emit and/or negotiate.
4426
 *                 (Typical: the smaller of #MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN and
4427
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN, usually `2^14` bytes)
4428
 *                 (Server: set maximum fragment length to emit,
4429
 *                 usually negotiated by the client during handshake)
4430
 *                 (Client: set maximum fragment length to emit *and*
4431
 *                 negotiate with the server during handshake)
4432
 *                 (Default: #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE)
4433
 *
4434
 * \note           On the client side, the maximum fragment length extension
4435
 *                 *will not* be used, unless the maximum fragment length has
4436
 *                 been set via this function to a value different than
4437
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE.
4438
 *
4439
 * \note           With TLS, this currently only affects ApplicationData (sent
4440
 *                 with \c mbedtls_ssl_read()), not handshake messages.
4441
 *                 With DTLS, this affects both ApplicationData and handshake.
4442
 *
4443
 * \note           This sets the maximum length for a record's payload,
4444
 *                 excluding record overhead that will be added to it, see
4445
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion().
4446
 *
4447
 * \note           For DTLS, it is also possible to set a limit for the total
4448
 *                 size of datagrams passed to the transport layer, including
4449
 *                 record overhead, see \c mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu().
4450
 *
4451
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4452
 * \param mfl_code Code for maximum fragment length (allowed values:
4453
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_512,  MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_1024,
4454
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_2048, MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_4096)
4455
 *
4456
 * \return         0 if successful or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA
4457
 */
4458
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_frag_len(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, unsigned char mfl_code);
4459
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH */
4460
4461
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
4462
/**
4463
 * \brief          Pick the ciphersuites order according to the second parameter
4464
 *                 in the SSL Server module (MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C).
4465
 *                 (Default, if never called: MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER)
4466
 *
4467
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4468
 * \param order    Server or client (MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER
4469
 *                                or MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_CLIENT)
4470
 */
4471
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_preference_order(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int order);
4472
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
4473
4474
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
4475
/**
4476
 * \brief          Enable / Disable TLS 1.2 session tickets (client only,
4477
 *                 TLS 1.2 only). Enabled by default.
4478
 *
4479
 * \note           On server, use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets_cb().
4480
 *
4481
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4482
 * \param use_tickets   Enable or disable (#MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED or
4483
 *                                         #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED)
4484
 */
4485
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int use_tickets);
4486
4487
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
4488
/**
4489
 * \brief Enable / Disable handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket messages
4490
 *        (client only, TLS 1.3 only).
4491
 *
4492
 *        The handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket messages is disabled by
4493
 *        default.
4494
 *
4495
 *        In TLS 1.3, servers may send a NewSessionTicket message at any time,
4496
 *        and may send multiple NewSessionTicket messages. By default, TLS 1.3
4497
 *        clients ignore NewSessionTicket messages.
4498
 *
4499
 *        To support session tickets in TLS 1.3 clients, call this function
4500
 *        with #MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED. When
4501
 *        this is enabled, when a client receives a NewSessionTicket message,
4502
 *        the next call to a message processing functions (notably
4503
 *        mbedtls_ssl_handshake() and mbedtls_ssl_read()) will return
4504
 *        #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET. The client should then
4505
 *        call mbedtls_ssl_get_session() to retrieve the session ticket before
4506
 *        calling the same message processing function again.
4507
 *
4508
 * \param conf  SSL configuration
4509
 * \param signal_new_session_tickets Enable or disable
4510
 *                                   (#MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED or
4511
 *                                    #MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED)
4512
 */
4513
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets(
4514
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int signal_new_session_tickets);
4515
4516
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
4517
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
4518
4519
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
4520
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
4521
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
4522
/**
4523
 * \brief   Number of NewSessionTicket messages for the server to send
4524
 *          after handshake completion.
4525
 *
4526
 * \note    The default value is
4527
 *          \c MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS.
4528
 *
4529
 * \note    In case of a session resumption, this setting only partially apply.
4530
 *          At most one ticket is sent in that case to just renew the pool of
4531
 *          tickets of the client. The rationale is to avoid the number of
4532
 *          tickets on the server to become rapidly out of control when the
4533
 *          server has the same configuration for all its connection instances.
4534
 *
4535
 * \param conf    SSL configuration
4536
 * \param num_tickets    Number of NewSessionTicket.
4537
 *
4538
 */
4539
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_new_session_tickets(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4540
                                          uint16_t num_tickets);
4541
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS &&
4542
          MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C &&
4543
          MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3*/
4544
4545
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
4546
/**
4547
 * \brief          Enable / Disable renegotiation support for connection when
4548
 *                 initiated by peer
4549
 *                 (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED)
4550
 *
4551
 * \warning        It is recommended to always disable renegotiation unless you
4552
 *                 know you need it and you know what you're doing. In the
4553
 *                 past, there have been several issues associated with
4554
 *                 renegotiation or a poor understanding of its properties.
4555
 *
4556
 * \note           Server-side, enabling renegotiation also makes the server
4557
 *                 susceptible to a resource DoS by a malicious client.
4558
 *
4559
 * \param conf    SSL configuration
4560
 * \param renegotiation     Enable or disable (MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_ENABLED or
4561
 *                                             MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED)
4562
 */
4563
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int renegotiation);
4564
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
4565
4566
/**
4567
 * \brief          Prevent or allow legacy renegotiation.
4568
 *                 (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION)
4569
 *
4570
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION allows connections to
4571
 *                 be established even if the peer does not support
4572
 *                 secure renegotiation, but does not allow renegotiation
4573
 *                 to take place if not secure.
4574
 *                 (Interoperable and secure option)
4575
 *
4576
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_ALLOW_RENEGOTIATION allows renegotiations
4577
 *                 with non-upgraded peers. Allowing legacy renegotiation
4578
 *                 makes the connection vulnerable to specific man in the
4579
 *                 middle attacks. (See RFC 5746)
4580
 *                 (Most interoperable and least secure option)
4581
 *
4582
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE breaks off connections
4583
 *                 if peer does not support secure renegotiation. Results
4584
 *                 in interoperability issues with non-upgraded peers
4585
 *                 that do not support renegotiation altogether.
4586
 *                 (Most secure option, interoperability issues)
4587
 *
4588
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4589
 * \param allow_legacy  Prevent or allow (SSL_NO_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION,
4590
 *                                        SSL_ALLOW_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION or
4591
 *                                        MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE)
4592
 */
4593
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_legacy_renegotiation(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int allow_legacy);
4594
4595
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
4596
/**
4597
 * \brief          Enforce renegotiation requests.
4598
 *                 (Default: enforced, max_records = 16)
4599
 *
4600
 *                 When we request a renegotiation, the peer can comply or
4601
 *                 ignore the request. This function allows us to decide
4602
 *                 whether to enforce our renegotiation requests by closing
4603
 *                 the connection if the peer doesn't comply.
4604
 *
4605
 *                 However, records could already be in transit from the peer
4606
 *                 when the request is emitted. In order to increase
4607
 *                 reliability, we can accept a number of records before the
4608
 *                 expected handshake records.
4609
 *
4610
 *                 The optimal value is highly dependent on the specific usage
4611
 *                 scenario.
4612
 *
4613
 * \note           With DTLS and server-initiated renegotiation, the
4614
 *                 HelloRequest is retransmitted every time mbedtls_ssl_read() times
4615
 *                 out or receives Application Data, until:
4616
 *                 - max_records records have beens seen, if it is >= 0, or
4617
 *                 - the number of retransmits that would happen during an
4618
 *                 actual handshake has been reached.
4619
 *                 Please remember the request might be lost a few times
4620
 *                 if you consider setting max_records to a really low value.
4621
 *
4622
 * \warning        On client, the grace period can only happen during
4623
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_read(), as opposed to mbedtls_ssl_write() and mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate()
4624
 *                 which always behave as if max_record was 0. The reason is,
4625
 *                 if we receive application data from the server, we need a
4626
 *                 place to write it, which only happens during mbedtls_ssl_read().
4627
 *
4628
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4629
 * \param max_records Use MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_NOT_ENFORCED if you don't want to
4630
 *                 enforce renegotiation, or a non-negative value to enforce
4631
 *                 it but allow for a grace period of max_records records.
4632
 */
4633
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation_enforced(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int max_records);
4634
4635
/**
4636
 * \brief          Set record counter threshold for periodic renegotiation.
4637
 *                 (Default: 2^48 - 1)
4638
 *
4639
 *                 Renegotiation is automatically triggered when a record
4640
 *                 counter (outgoing or incoming) crosses the defined
4641
 *                 threshold. The default value is meant to prevent the
4642
 *                 connection from being closed when the counter is about to
4643
 *                 reached its maximal value (it is not allowed to wrap).
4644
 *
4645
 *                 Lower values can be used to enforce policies such as "keys
4646
 *                 must be refreshed every N packets with cipher X".
4647
 *
4648
 *                 The renegotiation period can be disabled by setting
4649
 *                 conf->disable_renegotiation to
4650
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED.
4651
 *
4652
 * \note           When the configured transport is
4653
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM the maximum renegotiation
4654
 *                 period is 2^48 - 1, and for MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM,
4655
 *                 the maximum renegotiation period is 2^64 - 1.
4656
 *
4657
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4658
 * \param period   The threshold value: a big-endian 64-bit number.
4659
 */
4660
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation_period(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4661
                                           const unsigned char period[8]);
4662
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
4663
4664
/**
4665
 * \brief          Check if there is data already read from the
4666
 *                 underlying transport but not yet processed.
4667
 *
4668
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4669
 *
4670
 * \return         0 if nothing's pending, 1 otherwise.
4671
 *
4672
 * \note           This is different in purpose and behaviour from
4673
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes_avail in that it considers
4674
 *                 any kind of unprocessed data, not only unread
4675
 *                 application data. If \c mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes
4676
 *                 returns a non-zero value, this function will
4677
 *                 also signal pending data, but the converse does
4678
 *                 not hold. For example, in DTLS there might be
4679
 *                 further records waiting to be processed from
4680
 *                 the current underlying transport's datagram.
4681
 *
4682
 * \note           If this function returns 1 (data pending), this
4683
 *                 does not imply that a subsequent call to
4684
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_read will provide any data;
4685
 *                 e.g., the unprocessed data might turn out
4686
 *                 to be an alert or a handshake message.
4687
 *
4688
 * \note           This function is useful in the following situation:
4689
 *                 If the SSL/TLS module successfully returns from an
4690
 *                 operation - e.g. a handshake or an application record
4691
 *                 read - and you're awaiting incoming data next, you
4692
 *                 must not immediately idle on the underlying transport
4693
 *                 to have data ready, but you need to check the value
4694
 *                 of this function first. The reason is that the desired
4695
 *                 data might already be read but not yet processed.
4696
 *                 If, in contrast, a previous call to the SSL/TLS module
4697
 *                 returned MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, it is not necessary
4698
 *                 to call this function, as the latter error code entails
4699
 *                 that all internal data has been processed.
4700
 *
4701
 */
4702
int mbedtls_ssl_check_pending(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4703
4704
/**
4705
 * \brief          Return the number of application data bytes
4706
 *                 remaining to be read from the current record.
4707
 *
4708
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4709
 *
4710
 * \return         How many bytes are available in the application
4711
 *                 data record read buffer.
4712
 *
4713
 * \note           When working over a datagram transport, this is
4714
 *                 useful to detect the current datagram's boundary
4715
 *                 in case \c mbedtls_ssl_read has written the maximal
4716
 *                 amount of data fitting into the input buffer.
4717
 *
4718
 */
4719
size_t mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes_avail(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4720
4721
/**
4722
 * \brief          Return the result of the certificate verification
4723
 *
4724
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
4725
 *
4726
 * \return         \c 0 if the certificate verification was successful.
4727
 * \return         \c -1u if the result is not available. This may happen
4728
 *                 e.g. if the handshake aborts early, or a verification
4729
 *                 callback returned a fatal error.
4730
 * \return         A bitwise combination of \c MBEDTLS_X509_BADCERT_XXX
4731
 *                 and \c MBEDTLS_X509_BADCRL_XXX failure flags; see x509.h.
4732
 */
4733
uint32_t mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4734
4735
/**
4736
 * \brief          Return the id of the current ciphersuite
4737
 *
4738
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4739
 *
4740
 * \return         a ciphersuite id
4741
 */
4742
int mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_id_from_ssl(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4743
4744
/**
4745
 * \brief          Return the name of the current ciphersuite
4746
 *
4747
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4748
 *
4749
 * \return         a string containing the ciphersuite name
4750
 */
4751
const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4752
4753
4754
/**
4755
 * \brief          Return the (D)TLS protocol version negotiated in the
4756
 *                 given connection.
4757
 *
4758
 * \note           If you call this function too early during the initial
4759
 *                 handshake, before the two sides have agreed on a version,
4760
 *                 this function returns #MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN.
4761
 *
4762
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to query.
4763
 * \return         The negotiated protocol version.
4764
 */
4765
static inline mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number(
4766
    const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
4767
0
{
4768
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
4769
0
}
4770
4771
/**
4772
 * \brief          Return the current TLS version
4773
 *
4774
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4775
 *
4776
 * \return         a string containing the TLS version
4777
 */
4778
const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_version(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4779
4780
/**
4781
 * \brief          Return the (maximum) number of bytes added by the record
4782
 *                 layer: header + encryption/MAC overhead (inc. padding)
4783
 *
4784
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4785
 *
4786
 * \return         Current maximum record expansion in bytes
4787
 */
4788
int mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4789
4790
/**
4791
 * \brief          Return the current maximum outgoing record payload in bytes.
4792
 *
4793
 * \note           The logic to determine the maximum outgoing record payload is
4794
 *                 version-specific. It takes into account various factors, such as
4795
 *                 the mbedtls_config.h setting \c MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN, extensions
4796
 *                 such as the max fragment length or record size limit extension if
4797
 *                 used, and for DTLS the path MTU as configured and current
4798
 *                 record expansion.
4799
 *
4800
 * \note           With DTLS, \c mbedtls_ssl_write() will return an error if
4801
 *                 called with a larger length value.
4802
 *                 With TLS, \c mbedtls_ssl_write() will fragment the input if
4803
 *                 necessary and return the number of bytes written; it is up
4804
 *                 to the caller to call \c mbedtls_ssl_write() again in
4805
 *                 order to send the remaining bytes if any.
4806
 *
4807
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload()
4808
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion()
4809
 *
4810
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4811
 *
4812
 * \return         Current maximum payload for an outgoing record,
4813
 *                 or a negative error code.
4814
 */
4815
int mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4816
4817
/**
4818
 * \brief          Return the current maximum incoming record payload in bytes.
4819
 *
4820
 * \note           The logic to determine the maximum incoming record payload is
4821
 *                 version-specific. It takes into account various factors, such as
4822
 *                 the mbedtls_config.h setting \c MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN, extensions
4823
 *                 such as the max fragment length extension or record size limit
4824
 *                 extension if used, and the current record expansion.
4825
 *
4826
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu()
4827
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_max_in_record_payload()
4828
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion()
4829
 *
4830
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4831
 *
4832
 * \return         Current maximum payload for an incoming record,
4833
 *                 or a negative error code.
4834
 */
4835
int mbedtls_ssl_get_max_in_record_payload(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4836
4837
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
4838
/**
4839
 * \brief          Return the peer certificate from the current connection.
4840
 *
4841
 * \param  ssl     The SSL context to use. This must be initialized and setup.
4842
 *
4843
 * \return         The current peer certificate, if available.
4844
 *                 The returned certificate is owned by the SSL context and
4845
 *                 is valid only until the next call to the SSL API.
4846
 * \return         \c NULL if no peer certificate is available. This might
4847
 *                 be because the chosen ciphersuite doesn't use CRTs
4848
 *                 (PSK-based ciphersuites, for example), or because
4849
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE has been disabled,
4850
 *                 allowing the stack to free the peer's CRT to save memory.
4851
 *
4852
 * \note           For one-time inspection of the peer's certificate during
4853
 *                 the handshake, consider registering an X.509 CRT verification
4854
 *                 callback through mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() instead of calling
4855
 *                 this function. Using mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() also comes at
4856
 *                 the benefit of allowing you to influence the verification
4857
 *                 process, for example by masking expected and tolerated
4858
 *                 verification failures.
4859
 *
4860
 * \warning        You must not use the pointer returned by this function
4861
 *                 after any further call to the SSL API, including
4862
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_read() and mbedtls_ssl_write(); this is
4863
 *                 because the pointer might change during renegotiation,
4864
 *                 which happens transparently to the user.
4865
 *                 If you want to use the certificate across API calls,
4866
 *                 you must make a copy.
4867
 */
4868
const mbedtls_x509_crt *mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cert(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4869
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
4870
4871
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
4872
/**
4873
 * \brief          Export a session in order to resume it later.
4874
 *
4875
 * \param ssl      The SSL context representing the connection for which to
4876
 *                 to export a session structure for later resumption.
4877
 * \param session  The target structure in which to store the exported session.
4878
 *                 This must have been initialized with mbedtls_ssl_session_init()
4879
 *                 but otherwise be unused.
4880
 *
4881
 * \note           This function can handle a variety of mechanisms for session
4882
 *                 resumption: For TLS 1.2, both session ID-based resumption and
4883
 *                 ticket-based resumption will be considered. For TLS 1.3,
4884
 *                 sessions equate to tickets, and if session tickets are
4885
 *                 enabled (see #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration
4886
 *                 option), this function exports the last received ticket and
4887
 *                 the exported session may be used to resume the TLS 1.3
4888
 *                 session. If session tickets are disabled, exported sessions
4889
 *                 cannot be used to resume a TLS 1.3 session.
4890
 *
4891
 * \return         \c 0 if successful. In this case, \p session can be used for
4892
 *                 session resumption by passing it to mbedtls_ssl_set_session(),
4893
 *                 and serialized for storage via mbedtls_ssl_session_save().
4894
 * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
4895
 *
4896
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_set_session()
4897
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_session_save()
4898
 */
4899
int mbedtls_ssl_get_session(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4900
                            mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
4901
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
4902
4903
/**
4904
 * \brief          Perform the SSL handshake
4905
 *
4906
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4907
 *
4908
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
4909
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
4910
 *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
4911
 *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
4912
 *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
4913
 *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
4914
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
4915
 *                 operation is in progress (see
4916
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
4917
 *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
4918
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
4919
 *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
4920
 *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
4921
 *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
4922
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED if DTLS is in use
4923
 *                 and the client did not demonstrate reachability yet - in
4924
 *                 this case you must stop using the context (see below).
4925
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
4926
 *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received. See the
4927
 *                 documentation of mbedtls_ssl_read() for more information
4928
 *                 about this error code.
4929
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
4930
 *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
4931
 *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
4932
 *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
4933
 *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
4934
 *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
4935
 *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
4936
 * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
4937
 *                 the context (see below).
4938
 *
4939
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than
4940
 *                 \c 0,
4941
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
4942
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
4943
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS or
4944
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
4945
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
4946
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
4947
 *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
4948
 *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
4949
 *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
4950
 *                 connection must be closed.
4951
 *
4952
 * \note           If DTLS is in use, then you may choose to handle
4953
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED specially for logging
4954
 *                 purposes, as it is an expected return value rather than an
4955
 *                 actual error, but you still need to reset/free the context.
4956
 *
4957
 * \note           Remarks regarding event-driven DTLS:
4958
 *                 If the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, no datagram
4959
 *                 from the underlying transport layer is currently being processed,
4960
 *                 and it is safe to idle until the timer or the underlying transport
4961
 *                 signal a new event. This is not true for a successful handshake,
4962
 *                 in which case the datagram of the underlying transport that is
4963
 *                 currently being processed might or might not contain further
4964
 *                 DTLS records.
4965
 *
4966
 * \note           If #MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO is enabled, the PSA crypto
4967
 *                 subsystem must have been initialized by calling
4968
 *                 psa_crypto_init() before calling this function.
4969
 *                 Otherwise, the handshake may call psa_crypto_init()
4970
 *                 if a negotiation involving TLS 1.3 takes place (this may
4971
 *                 be the case even if TLS 1.3 is offered but eventually
4972
 *                 not selected).
4973
 */
4974
int mbedtls_ssl_handshake(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4975
4976
/**
4977
 * \brief          After calling mbedtls_ssl_handshake() to start the SSL
4978
 *                 handshake you can call this function to check whether the
4979
 *                 handshake is over for a given SSL context. This function
4980
 *                 should be also used to determine when to stop calling
4981
 *                 mbedtls_handshake_step() for that context.
4982
 *
4983
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4984
 *
4985
 * \return         \c 1 if handshake is over, \c 0 if it is still ongoing.
4986
 */
4987
static inline int mbedtls_ssl_is_handshake_over(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
4988
0
{
4989
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state) >= MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_OVER;
4990
0
}
4991
4992
/**
4993
 * \brief          Perform a single step of the SSL handshake
4994
 *
4995
 * \note           The state of the context (ssl->state) will be at
4996
 *                 the next state after this function returns \c 0. Do not
4997
 *                 call this function if mbedtls_ssl_is_handshake_over()
4998
 *                 returns \c 1.
4999
 *
5000
 * \warning        Whilst in the past you may have used direct access to the
5001
 *                 context state (ssl->state) in order to ascertain when to
5002
 *                 stop calling this function and although you can still do
5003
 *                 so with something like ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state) or by
5004
 *                 defining MBEDTLS_ALLOW_PRIVATE_ACCESS, this is now
5005
 *                 considered deprecated and could be broken in any future
5006
 *                 release. If you still find you have good reason for such
5007
 *                 direct access, then please do contact the team to explain
5008
 *                 this (raise an issue or post to the mailing list), so that
5009
 *                 we can add a solution to your problem that will be
5010
 *                 guaranteed to work in the future.
5011
 *
5012
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5013
 *
5014
 * \return         See mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
5015
 *
5016
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than \c 0,
5017
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5018
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5019
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
5020
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5021
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA, you must stop using
5022
 *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it
5023
 *                 or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before
5024
 *                 re-using it for a new connection; the current connection
5025
 *                 must be closed.
5026
 */
5027
int mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5028
5029
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
5030
/**
5031
 * \brief          Initiate an SSL renegotiation on the running connection.
5032
 *                 Client: perform the renegotiation right now.
5033
 *                 Server: request renegotiation, which will be performed
5034
 *                 during the next call to mbedtls_ssl_read() if honored by
5035
 *                 client.
5036
 *
5037
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5038
 *
5039
 * \return         0 if successful, or any mbedtls_ssl_handshake() return
5040
 *                 value except #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT that can't
5041
 *                 happen during a renegotiation.
5042
 *
5043
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than \c 0,
5044
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5045
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS or
5046
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS, you must stop using
5047
 *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it
5048
 *                 or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before
5049
 *                 re-using it for a new connection; the current connection
5050
 *                 must be closed.
5051
 *
5052
 */
5053
int mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5054
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
5055
5056
/**
5057
 * \brief          Read at most 'len' application data bytes
5058
 *
5059
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5060
 * \param buf      buffer that will hold the data
5061
 * \param len      maximum number of bytes to read
5062
 *
5063
 * \return         The (positive) number of bytes read if successful.
5064
 * \return         \c 0 if the read end of the underlying transport was closed
5065
 *                 without sending a CloseNotify beforehand, which might happen
5066
 *                 because of various reasons (internal error of an underlying
5067
 *                 stack, non-conformant peer not sending a CloseNotify and
5068
 *                 such) - in this case you must stop using the context
5069
 *                 (see below).
5070
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PEER_CLOSE_NOTIFY if the underlying
5071
 *                 transport is still functional, but the peer has
5072
 *                 acknowledged to not send anything anymore.
5073
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
5074
 *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
5075
 *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
5076
 *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
5077
 *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
5078
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
5079
 *                 operation is in progress (see
5080
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
5081
 *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
5082
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
5083
 *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
5084
 *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
5085
 *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
5086
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT if we're at the server
5087
 *                 side of a DTLS connection and the client is initiating a
5088
 *                 new connection using the same source port. See below.
5089
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
5090
 *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received.
5091
 *                 This error code is only returned on the client side. It is
5092
 *                 only returned if handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket
5093
 *                 messages has been enabled through
5094
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets().
5095
 *                 This error code indicates that a TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket
5096
 *                 message has been received and parsed successfully by the
5097
 *                 client. The ticket data can be retrieved from the SSL
5098
 *                 context by calling mbedtls_ssl_get_session(). It remains
5099
 *                 available until the next call to mbedtls_ssl_read().
5100
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
5101
 *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
5102
 *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
5103
 *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
5104
 *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
5105
 *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
5106
 *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
5107
 * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
5108
 *                 the context (see below).
5109
 *
5110
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than
5111
 *                 a positive value,
5112
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
5113
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5114
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5115
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS,
5116
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT or
5117
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5118
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
5119
 *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
5120
 *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
5121
 *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
5122
 *                 connection must be closed.
5123
 *
5124
 * \note           When this function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT
5125
 *                 (which can only happen server-side), it means that a client
5126
 *                 is initiating a new connection using the same source port.
5127
 *                 You can either treat that as a connection close and wait
5128
 *                 for the client to resend a ClientHello, or directly
5129
 *                 continue with \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() with the same
5130
 *                 context (as it has been reset internally). Either way, you
5131
 *                 must make sure this is seen by the application as a new
5132
 *                 connection: application state, if any, should be reset, and
5133
 *                 most importantly the identity of the client must be checked
5134
 *                 again. WARNING: not validating the identity of the client
5135
 *                 again, or not transmitting the new identity to the
5136
 *                 application layer, would allow authentication bypass!
5137
 *
5138
 * \note           Remarks regarding event-driven DTLS:
5139
 *                 - If the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, no datagram
5140
 *                   from the underlying transport layer is currently being processed,
5141
 *                   and it is safe to idle until the timer or the underlying transport
5142
 *                   signal a new event.
5143
 *                 - This function may return MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ even if data was
5144
 *                   initially available on the underlying transport, as this data may have
5145
 *                   been only e.g. duplicated messages or a renegotiation request.
5146
 *                   Therefore, you must be prepared to receive MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ even
5147
 *                   when reacting to an incoming-data event from the underlying transport.
5148
 *                 - On success, the datagram of the underlying transport that is currently
5149
 *                   being processed may contain further DTLS records. You should call
5150
 *                   \c mbedtls_ssl_check_pending to check for remaining records.
5151
 *
5152
 */
5153
int mbedtls_ssl_read(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5154
5155
/**
5156
 * \brief          Try to write exactly 'len' application data bytes
5157
 *
5158
 * \warning        This function will do partial writes in some cases. If the
5159
 *                 return value is non-negative but less than length, the
5160
 *                 function must be called again with updated arguments:
5161
 *                 buf + ret, len - ret (if ret is the return value) until
5162
 *                 it returns a value equal to the last 'len' argument.
5163
 *
5164
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5165
 * \param buf      buffer holding the data
5166
 * \param len      how many bytes must be written
5167
 *
5168
 * \return         The (non-negative) number of bytes actually written if
5169
 *                 successful (may be less than \p len).
5170
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
5171
 *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
5172
 *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
5173
 *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
5174
 *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
5175
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
5176
 *                 operation is in progress (see
5177
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
5178
 *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
5179
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
5180
 *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
5181
 *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
5182
 *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
5183
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
5184
 *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received. See the
5185
 *                 documentation of mbedtls_ssl_read() for more information
5186
 *                 about this error code.
5187
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
5188
 *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
5189
 *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
5190
 *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
5191
 *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
5192
 *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
5193
 *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
5194
 * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
5195
 *                 the context (see below).
5196
 *
5197
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than
5198
 *                 a non-negative value,
5199
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
5200
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5201
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5202
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
5203
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5204
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
5205
 *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
5206
 *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
5207
 *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
5208
 *                 connection must be closed.
5209
 *
5210
 * \note           When this function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE/READ,
5211
 *                 it must be called later with the *same* arguments,
5212
 *                 until it returns a value greater than or equal to 0. When
5213
 *                 the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE there may be
5214
 *                 some partial data in the output buffer, however this is not
5215
 *                 yet sent.
5216
 *
5217
 * \note           If the requested length is greater than the maximum
5218
 *                 fragment length (either the built-in limit or the one set
5219
 *                 or negotiated with the peer), then:
5220
 *                 - with TLS, less bytes than requested are written.
5221
 *                 - with DTLS, MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA is returned.
5222
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload() may be used to
5223
 *                 query the active maximum fragment length.
5224
 *
5225
 * \note           Attempting to write 0 bytes will result in an empty TLS
5226
 *                 application record being sent.
5227
 */
5228
int mbedtls_ssl_write(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5229
5230
/**
5231
 * \brief           Send an alert message
5232
 *
5233
 * \param ssl       SSL context
5234
 * \param level     The alert level of the message
5235
 *                  (MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_WARNING or MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_FATAL)
5236
 * \param message   The alert message (SSL_ALERT_MSG_*)
5237
 *
5238
 * \return          0 if successful, or a specific SSL error code.
5239
 *
5240
 * \note           If this function returns something other than 0 or
5241
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ/WRITE, you must stop using
5242
 *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it or
5243
 *                 call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before re-using it
5244
 *                 for a new connection; the current connection must be closed.
5245
 */
5246
int mbedtls_ssl_send_alert_message(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5247
                                   unsigned char level,
5248
                                   unsigned char message);
5249
/**
5250
 * \brief          Notify the peer that the connection is being closed
5251
 *
5252
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5253
 *
5254
 * \return          0 if successful, or a specific SSL error code.
5255
 *
5256
 * \note           If this function returns something other than 0 or
5257
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ/WRITE, you must stop using
5258
 *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it or
5259
 *                 call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before re-using it
5260
 *                 for a new connection; the current connection must be closed.
5261
 */
5262
int mbedtls_ssl_close_notify(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5263
5264
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
5265
5266
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
5267
/**
5268
 * \brief          Read at most 'len' bytes of early data
5269
 *
5270
 * \note           This API is server specific.
5271
 *
5272
 * \warning        Early data is defined in the TLS 1.3 specification, RFC 8446.
5273
 *                 IMPORTANT NOTE from section 2.3 of the specification:
5274
 *
5275
 *                 The security properties for 0-RTT data are weaker than
5276
 *                 those for other kinds of TLS data. Specifically:
5277
 *                 - This data is not forward secret, as it is encrypted
5278
 *                   solely under keys derived using the offered PSK.
5279
 *                 - There are no guarantees of non-replay between connections.
5280
 *                   Protection against replay for ordinary TLS 1.3 1-RTT data
5281
 *                   is provided via the server's Random value, but 0-RTT data
5282
 *                   does not depend on the ServerHello and therefore has
5283
 *                   weaker guarantees. This is especially relevant if the
5284
 *                   data is authenticated either with TLS client
5285
 *                   authentication or inside the application protocol. The
5286
 *                   same warnings apply to any use of the
5287
 *                   early_exporter_master_secret.
5288
 *
5289
 * \warning        Mbed TLS does not implement any of the anti-replay defenses
5290
 *                 defined in section 8 of the TLS 1.3 specification:
5291
 *                 single-use of tickets or ClientHello recording within a
5292
 *                 given time window.
5293
 *
5294
 * \note           This function is used in conjunction with
5295
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake(), mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(),
5296
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_read() and mbedtls_ssl_write() to read early
5297
 *                 data when these functions return
5298
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA.
5299
 *
5300
 * \param ssl      SSL context, it must have been initialized and set up.
5301
 * \param buf      buffer that will hold the data
5302
 * \param len      maximum number of bytes to read
5303
 *
5304
 * \return         The (positive) number of bytes read if successful.
5305
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
5306
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_READ_EARLY_DATA if it is not
5307
 *                 possible to read early data for the SSL context \p ssl. Note
5308
 *                 that this function is intended to be called for an SSL
5309
 *                 context \p ssl only after a call to mbedtls_ssl_handshake(),
5310
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or
5311
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_write() for \p ssl that has returned
5312
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA.
5313
 */
5314
int mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5315
                                unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5316
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
5317
5318
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
5319
/**
5320
 * \brief          Try to write exactly 'len' application data bytes while
5321
 *                 performing the handshake (early data).
5322
 *
5323
 * \warning        Early data is defined in the TLS 1.3 specification, RFC 8446.
5324
 *                 IMPORTANT NOTE from section 2.3 of the specification:
5325
 *
5326
 *                 The security properties for 0-RTT data are weaker than
5327
 *                 those for other kinds of TLS data. Specifically:
5328
 *                 - This data is not forward secret, as it is encrypted
5329
 *                   solely under keys derived using the offered PSK.
5330
 *                 - There are no guarantees of non-replay between connections.
5331
 *                   Protection against replay for ordinary TLS 1.3 1-RTT data
5332
 *                   is provided via the server's Random value, but 0-RTT data
5333
 *                   does not depend on the ServerHello and therefore has
5334
 *                   weaker guarantees. This is especially relevant if the
5335
 *                   data is authenticated either with TLS client
5336
 *                   authentication or inside the application protocol. The
5337
 *                   same warnings apply to any use of the
5338
 *                   early_exporter_master_secret.
5339
 *
5340
 * \note           This function behaves mainly as mbedtls_ssl_write(). The
5341
 *                 specification of mbedtls_ssl_write() relevant to TLS 1.3
5342
 *                 (thus not the parts specific to (D)TLS1.2) applies to this
5343
 *                 function and the present documentation is mainly restricted
5344
 *                 to the differences with mbedtls_ssl_write(). One noticeable
5345
 *                 difference though is that mbedtls_ssl_write() aims to
5346
 *                 complete the handshake before to write application data
5347
 *                 while mbedtls_ssl_write_early() aims to drive the handshake
5348
 *                 just past the point where it is not possible to send early
5349
 *                 data anymore.
5350
 *
5351
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5352
 * \param buf      buffer holding the data
5353
 * \param len      how many bytes must be written
5354
 *
5355
 * \return         The (non-negative) number of bytes actually written if
5356
 *                 successful (may be less than \p len).
5357
 *
5358
 * \return         One additional specific error code compared to
5359
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_write():
5360
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA.
5361
 *
5362
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA is returned when it
5363
 *                 is not possible to write early data for the SSL context
5364
 *                 \p ssl.
5365
 *
5366
 *                 It may have been possible and it is not possible
5367
 *                 anymore because the client received the server Finished
5368
 *                 message, the server rejected early data or the maximum
5369
 *                 number of allowed early data for the PSK in use has been
5370
 *                 reached.
5371
 *
5372
 *                 It may never have been possible and will never be possible
5373
 *                 for the SSL context \p ssl because the use of early data
5374
 *                 is disabled for that context or more generally the context
5375
 *                 is not suitably configured to enable early data or the first
5376
 *                 call to the function was done while the handshake was
5377
 *                 already completed.
5378
 *
5379
 *                 It is not possible to write early data for the SSL context
5380
 *                 \p ssl and any subsequent call to this API will return this
5381
 *                 error code. But this does not preclude for using it with
5382
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_write(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or
5383
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake() and the handshake can be
5384
 *                 completed by calling one of these APIs.
5385
 *
5386
 * \note           This function may write early data only if the SSL context
5387
 *                 has been configured for the handshake with a PSK for which
5388
 *                 early data is allowed.
5389
 *
5390
 * \note           To maximize the number of early data that can be written in
5391
 *                 the course of the handshake, it is expected that this
5392
 *                 function starts the handshake for the SSL context \p ssl.
5393
 *                 But this is not mandatory.
5394
 *
5395
 * \note           This function does not provide any information on whether
5396
 *                 the server has accepted or will accept early data or not.
5397
 *                 When it returns a positive value, it just means that it
5398
 *                 has written early data to the server. To know whether the
5399
 *                 server has accepted early data or not, you should call
5400
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status() with the handshake
5401
 *                 completed.
5402
 */
5403
int mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5404
                                 const unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5405
5406
/**
5407
 * \brief Get the status of the negotiation of the use of early data.
5408
 *
5409
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to query
5410
 *
5411
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if this function is called
5412
 *                 from the server-side.
5413
 *
5414
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if this function is called
5415
 *                 prior to completion of the handshake.
5416
 *
5417
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_NOT_INDICATED if the client
5418
 *                 has not indicated the use of early data to the server.
5419
 *
5420
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_ACCEPTED if the client has
5421
 *                 indicated the use of early data and the server has accepted
5422
 *                 it.
5423
 *
5424
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_REJECTED if the client has
5425
 *                 indicated the use of early data but the server has rejected
5426
 *                 it. In this situation, the client may want to re-send the
5427
 *                 early data it may have tried to send by calling
5428
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data() as ordinary post-handshake
5429
 *                 application data by calling mbedtls_ssl_write().
5430
 *
5431
 */
5432
int mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5433
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
5434
5435
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
5436
5437
/**
5438
 * \brief          Free referenced items in an SSL context and clear memory
5439
 *
5440
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5441
 */
5442
void mbedtls_ssl_free(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5443
5444
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CONTEXT_SERIALIZATION)
5445
/**
5446
 * \brief          Save an active connection as serialized data in a buffer.
5447
 *                 This allows the freeing or re-using of the SSL context
5448
 *                 while still picking up the connection later in a way that
5449
 *                 it entirely transparent to the peer.
5450
 *
5451
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_context_load()
5452
 *
5453
 * \note           The serialized data only contains the data that is
5454
 *                 necessary to resume the connection: negotiated protocol
5455
 *                 options, session identifier, keys, etc.
5456
 *                 Loading a saved SSL context does not restore settings and
5457
 *                 state related to how the application accesses the context,
5458
 *                 such as configured callback functions, user data, pending
5459
 *                 incoming or outgoing data, etc.
5460
 *
5461
 * \note           This feature is currently only available under certain
5462
 *                 conditions, see the documentation of the return value
5463
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA for details.
5464
 *
5465
 * \note           When this function succeeds, it calls
5466
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on \p ssl which as a result is
5467
 *                 no longer associated with the connection that has been
5468
 *                 serialized. This avoids creating copies of the connection
5469
 *                 state. You're then free to either re-use the context
5470
 *                 structure for a different connection, or call
5471
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_free() on it. See the documentation of
5472
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() for more details.
5473
 *
5474
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to save. On success, it is no longer
5475
 *                 associated with the connection that has been serialized.
5476
 * \param buf      The buffer to write the serialized data to. It must be a
5477
 *                 writeable buffer of at least \p buf_len bytes, or may be \c
5478
 *                 NULL if \p buf_len is \c 0.
5479
 * \param buf_len  The number of bytes available for writing in \p buf.
5480
 * \param olen     The size in bytes of the data that has been or would have
5481
 *                 been written. It must point to a valid \c size_t.
5482
 *
5483
 * \note           \p olen is updated to the correct value regardless of
5484
 *                 whether \p buf_len was large enough. This makes it possible
5485
 *                 to determine the necessary size by calling this function
5486
 *                 with \p buf set to \c NULL and \p buf_len to \c 0. However,
5487
 *                 the value of \p olen is only guaranteed to be correct when
5488
 *                 the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL or
5489
 *                 \c 0. If the return value is different, then the value of
5490
 *                 \p olen is undefined.
5491
 *
5492
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
5493
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL if \p buf is too small.
5494
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed
5495
 *                 while resetting the context.
5496
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if a handshake is in
5497
 *                 progress, or there is pending data for reading or sending,
5498
 *                 or the connection does not use DTLS 1.2 with an AEAD
5499
 *                 ciphersuite, or renegotiation is enabled.
5500
 */
5501
int mbedtls_ssl_context_save(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5502
                             unsigned char *buf,
5503
                             size_t buf_len,
5504
                             size_t *olen);
5505
5506
/**
5507
 * \brief          Load serialized connection data to an SSL context.
5508
 *
5509
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_context_save()
5510
 *
5511
 * \warning        The same serialized data must never be loaded into more
5512
 *                 that one context. In order to ensure that, after
5513
 *                 successfully loading serialized data to an SSL context, you
5514
 *                 should immediately destroy or invalidate all copies of the
5515
 *                 serialized data that was loaded. Loading the same data in
5516
 *                 more than one context would cause severe security failures
5517
 *                 including but not limited to loss of confidentiality.
5518
 *
5519
 * \note           Before calling this function, the SSL context must be
5520
 *                 prepared in one of the two following ways. The first way is
5521
 *                 to take a context freshly initialised with
5522
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_init() and call mbedtls_ssl_setup() on it with
5523
 *                 the same ::mbedtls_ssl_config structure that was used in
5524
 *                 the original connection. The second way is to
5525
 *                 call mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on a context that was
5526
 *                 previously prepared as above but used in the meantime.
5527
 *                 Either way, you must not use the context to perform a
5528
 *                 handshake between calling mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
5529
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() and calling this function. You
5530
 *                 may however call other setter functions in that time frame
5531
 *                 as indicated in the note below.
5532
 *
5533
 * \note           Before or after calling this function successfully, you
5534
 *                 also need to configure some connection-specific callbacks
5535
 *                 and settings before you can use the connection again
5536
 *                 (unless they were already set before calling
5537
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() and the values are suitable for
5538
 *                 the present connection). Specifically, you want to call
5539
 *                 at least mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(),
5540
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb(), and
5541
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() or
5542
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() if they were set originally.
5543
 *                 All other SSL setter functions
5544
 *                 are not necessary to call, either because they're only used
5545
 *                 in handshakes, or because the setting is already saved. You
5546
 *                 might choose to call them anyway, for example in order to
5547
 *                 share code between the cases of establishing a new
5548
 *                 connection and the case of loading an already-established
5549
 *                 connection.
5550
 *
5551
 * \note           If you have new information about the path MTU, you want to
5552
 *                 call mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu() after calling this function, as
5553
 *                 otherwise this function would overwrite your
5554
 *                 newly-configured value with the value that was active when
5555
 *                 the context was saved.
5556
 *
5557
 * \note           When this function returns an error code, it calls
5558
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_free() on \p ssl. In this case, you need to
5559
 *                 prepare the context with the usual sequence starting with a
5560
 *                 call to mbedtls_ssl_init() if you want to use it again.
5561
 *
5562
 * \param ssl      The SSL context structure to be populated. It must have
5563
 *                 been prepared as described in the note above.
5564
 * \param buf      The buffer holding the serialized connection data. It must
5565
 *                 be a readable buffer of at least \p len bytes.
5566
 * \param len      The size of the serialized data in bytes.
5567
 *
5568
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
5569
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed.
5570
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH if the serialized data
5571
 *                 comes from a different Mbed TLS version or build.
5572
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
5573
 */
5574
int mbedtls_ssl_context_load(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5575
                             const unsigned char *buf,
5576
                             size_t len);
5577
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CONTEXT_SERIALIZATION */
5578
5579
/**
5580
 * \brief          Initialize an SSL configuration context
5581
 *                 Just makes the context ready for
5582
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults() or mbedtls_ssl_config_free().
5583
 *
5584
 * \note           You need to call mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults() unless you
5585
 *                 manually set all of the relevant fields yourself.
5586
 *
5587
 * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5588
 */
5589
void mbedtls_ssl_config_init(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
5590
5591
/**
5592
 * \brief          Load reasonable default SSL configuration values.
5593
 *                 (You need to call mbedtls_ssl_config_init() first.)
5594
 *
5595
 * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5596
 * \param endpoint MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
5597
 * \param transport MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM for TLS, or
5598
 *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM for DTLS
5599
 * \param preset   a MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_XXX value
5600
 *
5601
 * \note           See \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_transport() for notes on DTLS.
5602
 *
5603
 * \return         0 if successful, or
5604
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX_ALLOC_FAILED on memory allocation error.
5605
 */
5606
int mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
5607
                                int endpoint, int transport, int preset);
5608
5609
/**
5610
 * \brief          Free an SSL configuration context
5611
 *
5612
 * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5613
 */
5614
void mbedtls_ssl_config_free(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
5615
5616
/**
5617
 * \brief          Initialize SSL session structure
5618
 *
5619
 * \param session  SSL session
5620
 */
5621
void mbedtls_ssl_session_init(mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
5622
5623
/**
5624
 * \brief          Free referenced items in an SSL session including the
5625
 *                 peer certificate and clear memory
5626
 *
5627
 * \note           A session object can be freed even if the SSL context
5628
 *                 that was used to retrieve the session is still in use.
5629
 *
5630
 * \param session  SSL session
5631
 */
5632
void mbedtls_ssl_session_free(mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
5633
5634
/**
5635
 * \brief          TLS-PRF function for key derivation.
5636
 *
5637
 * \param prf      The tls_prf type function type to be used.
5638
 * \param secret   Secret for the key derivation function.
5639
 * \param slen     Length of the secret.
5640
 * \param label    String label for the key derivation function,
5641
 *                 terminated with null character.
5642
 * \param random   Random bytes.
5643
 * \param rlen     Length of the random bytes buffer.
5644
 * \param dstbuf   The buffer holding the derived key.
5645
 * \param dlen     Length of the output buffer.
5646
 *
5647
 * \return         0 on success. An SSL specific error on failure.
5648
 */
5649
int  mbedtls_ssl_tls_prf(const mbedtls_tls_prf_types prf,
5650
                         const unsigned char *secret, size_t slen,
5651
                         const char *label,
5652
                         const unsigned char *random, size_t rlen,
5653
                         unsigned char *dstbuf, size_t dlen);
5654
5655
#ifdef __cplusplus
5656
}
5657
#endif
5658
5659
#endif /* ssl.h */